Prove2Me
Navigate
DiscoverFormalpediaBlogsUsersMomentumMy Missions+
Prove2Me
⌕
Log in

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

Convex Optimization

236 missions · 136 completed

Missions

Open100Completed136All236
🏆Completed
CombinatoricsOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Convexity and Steinitz's Exchange Property III: Fenchel-Type Min-Max Duality with Primal and Dual Integrality for M-Concave and M-Convex FunctionsResearch Paper

Motivation

Several classical min-max theorems of combinatorial optimization say that a discrete maximization problem and a continuous minimization problem have the same optimal value, and that both have integral optimal solutions when the data are integral. Edmonds' polymatroid intersection theorem (1970), Fujishige's Fenchel-type duality for submodular functions (1984), Frank's discrete separation theorem for a submodular/supermodular pair (1982), and the potential characterizations of weighted matroid intersection (Frank's weight splitting theorem, 1981; Iri and Tomizawa's criterion for the assignment problem, 1976) are instances. Murota's paper Convexity and Steinitz's exchange property, 1996 places all of them under one theorem: a Fenchel-type min-max formula for a pair of an M-concave and an M-convex function, with integrality on both sides.

Timeline:

  • 1970: Edmonds proves the polymatroid intersection theorem.
  • 1982: Frank proves the discrete separation theorem for submodular/supermodular set functions, with integrality.
  • 1984: Fujishige proves a Fenchel-type min-max theorem for submodular functions.
  • 1976–1981: Iri and Tomizawa characterize optimality for independent assignment by potentials; Frank proves the weight splitting theorem for weighted matroid intersection (1981).
  • Early 1990s: Dress and Wenzel introduce valuated matroids.
  • 1995–1996: Murota proves the valuated matroid intersection theorem (SIAM J. Discrete Math. 9, 1996) and the M-concave intersection theorem (Bonn report, 1995), and in the present paper the Fenchel-type duality (Theorem 6.4).
  • Later: the result becomes the central duality theorem of discrete convex analysis (Murota, Discrete Convex Analysis, SIAM, 2003).

Setting

Let VVV be a finite nonempty set. For u∈Vu\in Vu∈V, χu∈ZV\chi_u\in\mathbb Z^Vχu​∈ZV is its characteristic vector; for x∈RVx\in\mathbb R^Vx∈RV, supp⁡±(x)\operatorname{supp}^{\pm}(x)supp±(x) are the sets of coordinates where xxx is positive or negative, x(X)=∑v∈Xx(v)x(X)=\sum_{v\in X}x(v)x(X)=∑v∈X​x(v), and ⟨p,x⟩=∑vp(v)x(v)\langle p,x\rangle=\sum_v p(v)x(v)⟨p,x⟩=∑v​p(v)x(v).

A finite integral base set is a finite nonempty B⊆ZVB\subseteq\mathbb Z^VB⊆ZV such that for x,y∈Bx,y\in Bx,y∈B and u∈supp⁡+(x−y)u\in\operatorname{supp}^+(x-y)u∈supp+(x−y) some v∈supp⁡−(x−y)v\in\operatorname{supp}^-(x-y)v∈supp−(x−y) has x−χu+χv∈Bx-\chi_u+\chi_v\in Bx−χu​+χv​∈B. These are exactly the integer points of integral base polytopes of submodular systems. B‾\overline BB is the convex hull of BBB.

A function ω:B→R\omega:B\to\mathbb Rω:B→R has the exchange property (EXC), and is called M-concave, if for x,y∈Bx,y\in Bx,y∈B and u∈supp⁡+(x−y)u\in\operatorname{supp}^+(x-y)u∈supp+(x−y) some v∈supp⁡−(x−y)v\in\operatorname{supp}^-(x-y)v∈supp−(x−y) has x−χu+χv, y+χu−χv∈Bx-\chi_u+\chi_v,\ y+\chi_u-\chi_v\in Bx−χu​+χv​, y+χu​−χv​∈B and

ω(x)+ω(y)≤ω(x−χu+χv)+ω(y+χu−χv).\omega(x)+\omega(y)\le\omega(x-\chi_u+\chi_v)+\omega(y+\chi_u-\chi_v).ω(x)+ω(y)≤ω(x−χu​+χv​)+ω(y+χu​−χv​).

A function ζ\zetaζ is M-convex when −ζ-\zeta−ζ is M-concave.

For ω:B1→R\omega:B_1\to\mathbb Rω:B1​→R and ζ:B2→R\zeta:B_2\to\mathbb Rζ:B2​→R the concave conjugate and convex conjugate are

ω∘(p)=min⁡x∈B1(⟨p,x⟩−ω(x)),ζ∙(p)=max⁡x∈B2(⟨p,x⟩−ζ(x)),\omega^\circ(p)=\min_{x\in B_1}\big(\langle p,x\rangle-\omega(x)\big),\qquad \zeta^\bullet(p)=\max_{x\in B_2}\big(\langle p,x\rangle-\zeta(x)\big),ω∘(p)=x∈B1​min​(⟨p,x⟩−ω(x)),ζ∙(p)=x∈B2​max​(⟨p,x⟩−ζ(x)),

and the concave closure and convex closure are ω^(b)=inf⁡p(⟨p,b⟩−ω∘(p))\hat\omega(b)=\inf_p(\langle p,b\rangle-\omega^\circ(p))ω^(b)=infp​(⟨p,b⟩−ω∘(p)) and ζˇ(b)=sup⁡p(⟨p,b⟩−ζ∙(p))\check\zeta(b)=\sup_p(\langle p,b\rangle-\zeta^\bullet(p))ζˇ​(b)=supp​(⟨p,b⟩−ζ∙(p)); they are finite exactly on B1‾\overline{B_1}B1​​ and B2‾\overline{B_2}B2​​.

The primal problem maximizes ω(x)−ζ(x)\omega(x)-\zeta(x)ω(x)−ζ(x) over x∈B1∩B2x\in B_1\cap B_2x∈B1​∩B2​; the relaxed primal problem maximizes ω^(b)−ζˇ(b)\hat\omega(b)-\check\zeta(b)ω^(b)−ζˇ​(b) over b∈B1‾∩B2‾b\in\overline{B_1}\cap\overline{B_2}b∈B1​​∩B2​​; the dual problem minimizes ζ∙(p)−ω∘(p)\zeta^\bullet(p)-\omega^\circ(p)ζ∙(p)−ω∘(p) over p∈RVp\in\mathbb R^Vp∈RV. A maximum over an empty family is −∞-\infty−∞.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6.4

If ω\omegaω and −ζ-\zeta−ζ satisfy (EXC), then

max⁡x∈B1∩B2(ω(x)−ζ(x))=max⁡b∈B1‾∩B2‾(ω^(b)−ζˇ(b))=inf⁡p∈RV(ζ∙(p)−ω∘(p)),\max_{x\in B_1\cap B_2}\big(\omega(x)-\zeta(x)\big)=\max_{b\in\overline{B_1}\cap\overline{B_2}}\big(\hat\omega(b)-\check\zeta(b)\big)=\inf_{p\in\mathbb R^V}\big(\zeta^\bullet(p)-\omega^\circ(p)\big),x∈B1​∩B2​max​(ω(x)−ζ(x))=b∈B1​​∩B2​​max​(ω^(b)−ζˇ​(b))=p∈RVinf​(ζ∙(p)−ω∘(p)),

with (P1) a finite dual infimum forces B1∩B2≠∅B_1\cap B_2\neq\emptysetB1​∩B2​=∅, and (P2) if B1∩B2≠∅B_1\cap B_2\neq\emptysetB1​∩B2​=∅ all values are finite and equal and the infimum is attained. If ω,ζ\omega,\zetaω,ζ are integer-valued, the infimum may be taken over p∈ZVp\in\mathbb Z^Vp∈ZV and is attained there when finite.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 6.3 (weak duality): for arbitrary ω,ζ\omega,\zetaω,ζ on finite nonempty sets, primal ≤\le≤ relaxed === dual (the Fenchel identity (6.5)).
  2. Lemma 6.1: (−f)∘(p)=−f∙(−p)(-f)^\circ(p)=-f^\bullet(-p)(−f)∘(p)=−f∙(−p) and (−f)∧=−fˇ(-f)^\wedge=-\check f(−f)∧=−fˇ​ on B‾\overline BB.
  3. Lemma 4.5: an M-concave ω\omegaω satisfies ω^=ω\hat\omega=\omegaω^=ω on BBB.
  4. Theorem 2.1: (B1) is equivalent to being the integer points of an integral submodular (or supermodular) base polytope, with the describing functions max⁡x∈Bx(X)\max_{x\in B}x(X)maxx∈B​x(X) and min⁡x∈Bx(X)\min_{x\in B}x(X)minx∈B​x(X).
  5. Theorem 6.5 (Frank's discrete separation theorem, cited in the paper).
  6. Lemma 6.7: four equivalent forms of boundedness of the dual problem.
  7. Theorem 6.6 (the M-concave intersection theorem, cited in the paper): optimality of x∗x^*x∗ for ω1+ω2\omega_1+\omega_2ω1​+ω2​ is equivalent to a potential p∗p^*p∗ with x∗x^*x∗ maximizing both ω1[−p∗]\omega_1[-p^*]ω1​[−p∗] and ω2[p∗]\omega_2[p^*]ω2​[p∗], integral when the data are.

Significance

The formula gives, in one statement, the integrality of an optimal solution of the relaxed primal problem (the essential content of the first half, as the paper observes on p. 296) and of the dual problem. The paper presents it as a unification of two groups of theorems: Edmonds' polymatroid intersection theorem, Fujishige's Fenchel-type duality and Frank's discrete separation theorem on one side, and Iri and Tomizawa's potential characterization for independent assignment with its extensions by Fujishige and Frank (weight splitting) on the other. In the paper it yields the primal and dual separation theorems (Theorems 6.8, 6.9) and the convolution results (Theorems 6.10, 6.11), and it is the prototype of the Fenchel-type duality of discrete convex analysis.

All results here are proved in the literature; none is known to be formalized. Mathlib has no submodular base polytopes, no matroid intersection theorem and no discrete convex analysis. A formal proof of Theorem 6.4 would also require formal proofs of the two cited results, Frank's discrete separation theorem and the M-concave intersection theorem, which the paper uses without proof.

Difficulty

Lemma 6.3 is polyhedral convex duality and holds for any functions. The content is equality with the integral problem: the relaxed maximum over the polytope B1‾∩B2‾\overline{B_1}\cap\overline{B_2}B1​​∩B2​​ must be attained at an integer point. For general finite sets it is not, and the intersection of two integral polytopes generally has fractional vertices. Both the integrality of B1‾∩B2‾\overline{B_1}\cap\overline{B_2}B1​​∩B2​​ (Edmonds) and the existence of an integral optimal potential depend on the exchange structure; a direct argument from the definitions of conjugates does not see it. The dual integrality claim, that ppp can be taken integral, is again specific to (EXC) and fails for general concave extensions.

Formalization scope

Lean conventions, all in namespace SteinitzExchange.Duality:

  • VVV is a type with [Fintype V] [DecidableEq V] [Nonempty V]; integer vectors are V → ℤ, real vectors V → ℝ; finite sets of integer vectors are Finset (V → ℤ).
  • A function on BBB is a total (V → ℤ) → ℝ used only at points of BBB. M-convexity of ζ\zetaζ is (EXC) for fun x => -ζ x; ω\omegaω lives on B1B_1B1​ and ζ\zetaζ on B2B_2B2​, which are distinct sets in general.
  • Conjugates are real-valued min/max over the finite set. The closures are real ⨅/⨆ over p∈RVp\in\mathbb R^Vp∈RV and are evaluated only on the convex hulls, where they equal the paper's values; off the hulls they carry a junk value instead of ∓∞\mp\infty∓∞, which no statement uses.
  • The three optimal values are in EReal, as suprema and infima of coerced reals, so no ∞−∞\infty-\infty∞−∞ occurs. EReal's supremum of the empty family is −∞-\infty−∞, the paper's convention. The dual infimum is never a real ⨅ (which would return 000 when unbounded and make (P1) meaningless).
  • Every "max" of the page includes attainment: (P2) asserts points xxx, bbb, ppp at which the three values are achieved; the integral dual infimum is attained when it is not −∞-\infty−∞.
  • "Integer-valued" means ω(x)∈Z\omega(x)\in\mathbb Zω(x)∈Z on B1B_1B1​ and ζ(x)∈Z\zeta(x)\in\mathbb Zζ(x)∈Z on B2B_2B2​; integral potentials and separating vectors are V → ℤ.
  • Theorem 2.1's "∀X⊂V\forall X\subset V∀X⊂V" is read as all X⊆VX\subseteq VX⊆V.

Formalizations that would trivialize the goal are excluded: an unrestricted real infimum for the dual, a convex closure built from ζ∘\zeta^\circζ∘ instead of ζ∙\zeta^\bulletζ∙, a single base set for both functions, and a relaxed maximum taken over all of RV\mathbb R^VRV instead of B1‾∩B2‾\overline{B_1}\cap\overline{B_2}B1​​∩B2​​.

Needed infrastructure: finite convex hulls and polyhedral Fenchel duality, submodular base polytopes and their integrality, Frank's separation theorem, and the valuated intersection theorem. The submodular-system layer (Theorem 2.1, Theorem 6.5) is reusable beyond this mission. Contributions to any milestone, including proofs of the two cited theorems, are welcome.

Selected references

  • K. Murota, Convexity and Steinitz's exchange property, Advances in Mathematics 124 (1996) 272–311. https://doi.org/10.1006/aima.1996.0084
  • K. Murota, Valuated matroid intersection I: optimality criteria, SIAM J. Discrete Math. 9 (1996) 545–561.
  • K. Murota, Submodular flow problem with a nonseparable cost function, Report 95843-OR, Forschungsinstitut für Diskrete Mathematik, Universität Bonn, 1995 (source of Theorem 6.6).
  • A. Frank, An algorithm for submodular functions on graphs, Annals of Discrete Mathematics 16 (1982) 97–120 (source of Theorem 6.5).
  • A. Frank, A weighted matroid intersection algorithm, J. Algorithms 2 (1981) 328–336.
  • J. Edmonds, Submodular functions, matroids and certain polyhedra, in: Combinatorial Structures and Their Applications, Gordon and Breach, New York, 1970, 69–87.
  • S. Fujishige, Theory of submodular programs: a Fenchel-type min-max theorem and subgradients of submodular functions, Mathematical Programming 29 (1984) 142–155.
  • M. Iri and N. Tomizawa, An algorithm for finding an optimal "independent assignment", J. Oper. Res. Soc. Japan 19 (1976) 32–57.
  • K. Murota, Discrete Convex Analysis, SIAM, 2003. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898718508
18 thms7 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
CombinatoricsOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Convexity and Steinitz's Exchange Property I: The Extension Theorem — M-Concavity Is Concave Extendability with Integral Base Polytope MaximizersResearch Paper

Motivation

Linear optimization over the bases of a matroid, over the integer points of a polymatroid, or over the flows of a network is well understood: the greedy algorithm is exact, the feasible sets are the integer points of polytopes described by submodular functions, and min-max theorems of Edmonds and Frank hold with integrality. Nonlinear objectives on the same sets are much less uniform. Valuated matroids (Dress and Wenzel, 1990; see Murota 2003) showed that a quantitative form of the Steinitz exchange axiom is exactly what keeps the greedy algorithm exact for a nonlinear weight. Kazuo Murota's paper Convexity and Steinitz's Exchange Property (Adv. Math. 124 (1996) 272–311) extends this exchange axiom from matroid bases to the integer points of arbitrary integral base polytopes, names the resulting functions M-concave, and proves that they are the discrete counterpart of concave functions. The paper is the starting point of discrete convex analysis (Murota, Discrete Convex Analysis, SIAM 2003), which is now used in auction theory (gross-substitutes valuations are M♮-concave), inventory and resource allocation, and combinatorial optimization.

This mission covers the first of the paper's three characterizations of M-concavity: the Extension Theorem (Theorem 4.6).

Setting

Let VVV be a finite nonempty set. For u∈Vu\in Vu∈V, χu∈ZV\chi_u\in\mathbb Z^Vχu​∈ZV is the characteristic vector of uuu. For x∈RVx\in\mathbb R^Vx∈RV, supp⁡+(x)={v∣x(v)>0}\operatorname{supp}^+(x)=\{v\mid x(v)>0\}supp+(x)={v∣x(v)>0}, supp⁡−(x)={v∣x(v)<0}\operatorname{supp}^-(x)=\{v\mid x(v)<0\}supp−(x)={v∣x(v)<0}, ∥x∥=∑v∣x(v)∣\|x\|=\sum_v|x(v)|∥x∥=∑v​∣x(v)∣, and ⟨p,x⟩=∑vp(v)x(v)\langle p,x\rangle=\sum_v p(v)x(v)⟨p,x⟩=∑v​p(v)x(v).

A finite integral base set is a finite nonempty B⊆ZVB\subseteq\mathbb Z^VB⊆ZV such that for x,y∈Bx,y\in Bx,y∈B and u∈supp⁡+(x−y)u\in\operatorname{supp}^+(x-y)u∈supp+(x−y) there is v∈supp⁡−(x−y)v\in\operatorname{supp}^-(x-y)v∈supp−(x−y) with x−χu+χv∈Bx-\chi_u+\chi_v\in Bx−χu​+χv​∈B (axiom (B1)). Examples are the incidence vectors of the bases of a matroid. Its convex hull B‾\overline BB is an integral base polytope; in general, an integral base polytope is the convex hull of some finite integral base set.

A function ω:B→R\omega:B\to\mathbb Rω:B→R satisfies the exchange property (EXC), and is called M-concave, if for all x,y∈Bx,y\in Bx,y∈B and u∈supp⁡+(x−y)u\in\operatorname{supp}^+(x-y)u∈supp+(x−y) there is v∈supp⁡−(x−y)v\in\operatorname{supp}^-(x-y)v∈supp−(x−y) with x−χu+χv∈Bx-\chi_u+\chi_v\in Bx−χu​+χv​∈B, y+χu−χv∈By+\chi_u-\chi_v\in By+χu​−χv​∈B and

ω(x)+ω(y)≤ω(x−χu+χv)+ω(y+χu−χv).\omega(x)+\omega(y)\le\omega(x-\chi_u+\chi_v)+\omega(y+\chi_u-\chi_v).ω(x)+ω(y)≤ω(x−χu​+χv​)+ω(y+χu​−χv​).

The local exchange property (EXCloc_{\mathrm{loc}}loc​) asks only, for x,y∈Bx,y\in Bx,y∈B with ∥x−y∥=4\|x-y\|=4∥x−y∥=4, for some u∈supp⁡+(x−y)u\in\operatorname{supp}^+(x-y)u∈supp+(x−y) and some v∈supp⁡−(x−y)v\in\operatorname{supp}^-(x-y)v∈supp−(x−y) with the same conclusion.

For p∈RVp\in\mathbb R^Vp∈RV, ω[p](x)=ω(x)+⟨p,x⟩\omega[p](x)=\omega(x)+\langle p,x\rangleω[p](x)=ω(x)+⟨p,x⟩, and argmax⁡(ω)={x∈B∣ω(x)≥ω(y) ∀y∈B}\operatorname{argmax}(\omega)=\{x\in B\mid\omega(x)\ge\omega(y)\ \forall y\in B\}argmax(ω)={x∈B∣ω(x)≥ω(y) ∀y∈B}. For any g:B→Rg:B\to\mathbb Rg:B→R, the concave conjugate is g∘(p)=min⁡x∈B(⟨p,x⟩−g(x))g^\circ(p)=\min_{x\in B}(\langle p,x\rangle-g(x))g∘(p)=minx∈B​(⟨p,x⟩−g(x)) and the concave closure is g^(b)=inf⁡p∈RV(⟨p,b⟩−g∘(p))\hat g(b)=\inf_{p\in\mathbb R^V}(\langle p,b\rangle-g^\circ(p))g^​(b)=infp∈RV​(⟨p,b⟩−g∘(p)), a concave function that is finite exactly on B‾\overline BB. A function ωˉ:B‾→R\bar\omega:\overline B\to\mathbb Rωˉ:B→R extends ω\omegaω if ωˉ=ω\bar\omega=\omegaωˉ=ω on BBB.

Formalization targets

Goal: the Extension Theorem (Theorem 4.6)

For a finite integral base set BBB and ω:B→R\omega:B\to\mathbb Rω:B→R,

ω satisfies (EXC)  ⟺  ∃ ωˉ:B‾→R concave, ωˉ∣B=ω, ∀p: argmax⁡B‾(ωˉ[p]) is an integral base polytope.\omega\ \text{satisfies (EXC)}\iff\exists\,\bar\omega:\overline B\to\mathbb R\ \text{concave},\ \bar\omega|_B=\omega,\ \forall p:\ \operatorname{argmax}_{\overline B}(\bar\omega[p])\ \text{is an integral base polytope}.ω satisfies (EXC)⟺∃ωˉ:B→R concave, ωˉ∣B​=ω, ∀p: argmaxB​(ωˉ[p]) is an integral base polytope.

Milestones

  • Lemma 3.2 (p. 282): under (EXCloc_{\mathrm{loc}}loc​), for y=x−χu0−χu1+χv0+χv1∈By=x-\chi_{u_0}-\chi_{u_1}+\chi_{v_0}+\chi_{v_1}\in By=x−χu0​​−χu1​​+χv0​​+χv1​​∈B, ωp(y)−ωp(x)≤max⁡(π00+π11,π01+π10)\omega_p(y)-\omega_p(x)\le\max(\pi_{00}+\pi_{11},\pi_{01}+\pi_{10})ωp​(y)−ωp​(x)≤max(π00​+π11​,π01​+π10​) with πij=ωp(x−χui+χvj)−ωp(x)\pi_{ij}=\omega_p(x-\chi_{u_i}+\chi_{v_j})-\omega_p(x)πij​=ωp​(x−χui​​+χvj​​)−ωp​(x) (−∞-\infty−∞ off BBB).
  • Theorem 3.1 (p. 282): (EXC)   ⟺  \iff⟺ (EXCloc_{\mathrm{loc}}loc​).
  • Theorem 2.2 (p. 280): (EXC) for ω\omegaω implies (EXC) for every ω[p]\omega[p]ω[p].
  • Lemma 4.3 (p. 285): under (EXC), argmax⁡(ω)\operatorname{argmax}(\omega)argmax(ω) is an integral base set.
  • Lemma 4.1 (p. 285): g^≥g\hat g\ge gg^​≥g on BBB; max⁡B‾g^=max⁡Bg\max_{\overline B}\hat g=\max_B gmaxB​g^​=maxB​g; argmax⁡(g^)=argmax⁡(g)‾\operatorname{argmax}(\hat g)=\overline{\operatorname{argmax}(g)}argmax(g^​)=argmax(g)​.
  • Lemma 4.2 (p. 285): (g[p0])∘(p)=g∘(p−p0)(g[p_0])^\circ(p)=g^\circ(p-p_0)(g[p0​])∘(p)=g∘(p−p0​) and (g[p0])∧=g^+⟨p0,⋅⟩(g[p_0])^\wedge=\hat g+\langle p_0,\cdot\rangle(g[p0​])∧=g^​+⟨p0​,⋅⟩ on B‾\overline BB.
  • Theorem 4.4 (p. 286): (EXC)   ⟺  \iff⟺ argmax⁡(ω[p])\operatorname{argmax}(\omega[p])argmax(ω[p]) is an integral base set for every ppp.
  • Lemma 4.5 (p. 288): under (EXC), ω^=ω\hat\omega=\omegaω^=ω on BBB.

Significance

The Extension Theorem identifies a combinatorial axiom with a convex-analytic property: M-concave functions are exactly the restrictions to lattice points of concave functions on the base polytope whose linear perturbations are all maximized on integral base polytopes. It is the reason the M-concave class supports a convex-analysis-style theory at all: local optimality implies global optimality, maximizers of linear perturbations are well behaved, and conjugacy (the paper's Theorems 5.3 and 6.4, separate missions of this series) can be developed. Theorem 3.1 on its own is widely used to verify M-concavity in applications, since it reduces the exchange axiom to pairs at distance four.

All results here were proved in 1996. To our knowledge none of them has a machine-checked proof; Mathlib has matroids on sets but no integral base sets in ZV\mathbb Z^VZV, no M-concave functions and no concave closure of a function on a finite set. A formal proof of this chain would be a first formal development of discrete convex analysis.

Difficulty

The equivalence of (EXC) with its local version (Theorem 3.1) is not a routine induction on ∥x−y∥\|x-y\|∥x−y∥: the exchange inequality for a far pair does not follow from the inequalities along a path of distance-4 pairs, because the exchange partner vvv must be chosen consistently with the prescribed uuu. For the "if" direction of Theorem 4.4, knowing that every maximizer set is an integral base set says nothing directly about the values of ω\omegaω at non-maximizing points; turning this global information on maximizers into the local inequality (EXCloc_{\mathrm{loc}}loc​) requires a supporting hyperplane of the concave closure at a well-chosen point and the integrality of the intersection of an integral base polytope with a box (a cited result on submodular systems). Theorem 4.6 then needs the concave closure to agree with ω\omegaω on BBB (Lemma 4.5), which fails for general ω\omegaω.

Formalization scope

All declarations live in the namespace SteinitzExchange.Extension. The ground set is a type V with [Fintype V] [DecidableEq V] [Nonempty V]; integer vectors are V → ℤ, real vectors V → ℝ, and toReal embeds the former into the latter. BBB is a Finset (V → ℤ). A function ω:B→R\omega:B\to\mathbb Rω:B→R is a total (V → ℤ) → ℝ whose values are only ever read at points required to be in BBB. B‾\overline BB is Mathlib's convexHull ℝ of the image of BBB. Pinned readings:

  1. Integral base polytope means the convex hull of a finite nonempty set satisfying (B1) (by the paper's Theorem 2.1 this is its meaning), not "a polytope with integer vertices".
  2. The concave closure is a real infimum; it is the paper's value on B‾\overline BB and a junk value 000 off B‾\overline BB (the paper's −∞-\infty−∞), so every statement uses it only on B‾\overline BB. argmax⁡(g^)\operatorname{argmax}(\hat g)argmax(g^​) and argmax⁡(ωˉ[p])\operatorname{argmax}(\bar\omega[p])argmax(ωˉ[p]) range over B‾\overline BB only; the concave conjugate is a minimum over the nonempty finite BBB.
  3. Lemma 3.2's maximum with −∞-\infty−∞ entries is stated as: for one of the two pairings both exchanged points lie in BBB and the bound holds for that pairing.
  4. Theorem 4.4 and Lemma 4.3 conclude that argmax⁡(ω[p])\operatorname{argmax}(\omega[p])argmax(ω[p]) is itself an integral base set. Read literally ("its convex hull is an integral base polytope") the "if" direction of Theorem 4.4 is false: B={(2,0),(1,1),(0,2)}B=\{(2,0),(1,1),(0,2)\}B={(2,0),(1,1),(0,2)} with ω=(0,−1,0)\omega=(0,-1,0)ω=(0,−1,0) is a counterexample. The paper's proof, its gloss in Lemma 4.3 and its use on p. 292 all take the integral-base-set reading. Theorem 4.6 needs no such adjustment and is stated as printed.
  5. Theorem 2.2 carries the standing assumption of §2.3 that ω\omegaω satisfies (EXC).

Trivializing formalizations are ruled out: the extension ωˉ\bar\omegaωˉ must agree with ω\omegaω on BBB and be concave on B‾\overline BB, the argmax is over B‾\overline BB and not over RV\mathbb R^VRV, and an integral base polytope is never empty.

A complete development needs basic facts on integral base sets (the equivalence of (B1) with the simultaneous exchange (B2), B=ZV∩B‾B=\mathbb Z^V\cap\overline BB=ZV∩B, and the paper's cited Theorem 2.1 relating them to submodular functions), the representation (4.3) of the concave closure as a maximum of convex combinations, and supporting hyperplanes of polyhedral concave functions. The layer of integral base sets and M-concave functions is reusable for the two other missions of this series and for any later formalization of discrete convex analysis; contributions of general-purpose lemmas about it are welcome.

Selected references

  • K. Murota, Convexity and Steinitz's exchange property, Advances in Mathematics 124 (1996) 272–311. https://doi.org/10.1006/aima.1996.0084
  • K. Murota, Discrete Convex Analysis, SIAM Monographs on Discrete Mathematics and Applications, 2003. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898718508
21 thms7 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Numerical AnalysisOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

A Nonmonotone Line Search Technique and Its Application to Unconstrained Optimization II: R-Linear Convergence for Strongly Convex FunctionsResearch Paper

Motivation

Line search methods for unconstrained minimization of a smooth function f:Rn→Rf : \mathbb{R}^n \to \mathbb{R}f:Rn→R choose a direction dkd_kdk​ and a step αk>0\alpha_k > 0αk​>0 and set xk+1=xk+αkdkx_{k+1} = x_k + \alpha_k d_kxk+1​=xk​+αk​dk​. Classical rules (Armijo, Wolfe) insist that every step decrease fff. For quasi-Newton and conjugate gradient directions this monotonicity requirement often forces short steps, and nonmonotone line searches, which only ask for a decrease relative to some reference value built from past iterates, have been used since Grippo, Lampariello and Lucidi (1986) to let such methods take longer steps.

Zhang and Hager (SIAM J. Optim., 2004) replaced the maximum of recent function values used by Grippo et al. with a weighted average CkC_kCk​ of all past function values. The paper proves two results: global convergence to stationary points (the companion mission) and, the subject of this mission, R-linear convergence of the function values when fff is strongly convex.

Timeline:

  • 1986, Grippo, Lampariello, Lucidi: nonmonotone line search based on the maximum of the last MMM function values; global convergence.
  • 2002, Dai: R-linear convergence of the max-based scheme for strongly convex fff.
  • 2004, Zhang and Hager: the averaged reference value CkC_kCk​; global convergence (Theorem 2.2) and R-linear convergence for strongly convex fff (Theorem 3.1).

Setting

Fix parameters 0≤ηmin⁡≤ηmax⁡≤10 \le \eta_{\min} \le \eta_{\max} \le 10≤ηmin​≤ηmax​≤1, 0<δ<σ<1<ρ0 < \delta < \sigma < 1 < \rho0<δ<σ<1<ρ and μ>0\mu > 0μ>0. Write gk=∇f(xk)g_k = \nabla f(x_k)gk​=∇f(xk​) and ∇f(x)d=⟨∇f(x),d⟩\nabla f(x)d = \langle \nabla f(x), d\rangle∇f(x)d=⟨∇f(x),d⟩. The Nonmonotone Line Search Algorithm (NLSA) keeps weights QkQ_kQk​ and reference values CkC_kCk​:

Q0=1,  Qk+1=ηkQk+1,C0=f(x0),  Ck+1=ηkQkCk+f(xk+1)Qk+1,Q_0 = 1,\ \ Q_{k+1} = \eta_k Q_k + 1,\qquad C_0 = f(x_0),\ \ C_{k+1} = \frac{\eta_k Q_k C_k + f(x_{k+1})}{Q_{k+1}},Q0​=1,  Qk+1​=ηk​Qk​+1,C0​=f(x0​),  Ck+1​=Qk+1​ηk​Qk​Ck​+f(xk+1​)​,

with ηk∈[ηmin⁡,ηmax⁡]\eta_k \in [\eta_{\min}, \eta_{\max}]ηk​∈[ηmin​,ηmax​] chosen freely at each step. A step αk\alpha_kαk​ is accepted either by the nonmonotone Wolfe conditions

f(xk+αkdk)≤Ck+δαkgkTdk,∇f(xk+αkdk)dk≥σgkTdk,f(x_k + \alpha_k d_k) \le C_k + \delta\alpha_k g_k^{\mathsf T} d_k,\qquad \nabla f(x_k + \alpha_k d_k) d_k \ge \sigma g_k^{\mathsf T} d_k,f(xk​+αk​dk​)≤Ck​+δαk​gkT​dk​,∇f(xk​+αk​dk​)dk​≥σgkT​dk​,

or by the nonmonotone Armijo rule αk=αˉkρhk\alpha_k = \bar\alpha_k \rho^{h_k}αk​=αˉk​ρhk​, where αˉk>0\bar\alpha_k > 0αˉk​>0 is a trial step and hkh_khk​ is the largest integer such that the first inequality holds and αk≤μ\alpha_k \le \muαk​≤μ. With ηk=0\eta_k = 0ηk​=0 one recovers the monotone rules.

The direction assumption asks for constants c1,c2>0c_1, c_2 > 0c1​,c2​>0 with gkTdk≤−c1∥gk∥2g_k^{\mathsf T} d_k \le -c_1\|g_k\|^2gkT​dk​≤−c1​∥gk​∥2 and ∥dk∥≤c2∥gk∥\|d_k\| \le c_2\|g_k\|∥dk​∥≤c2​∥gk​∥. The function fff is strongly convex with constant γ>0\gamma > 0γ>0 if

f(x)≥f(y)+∇f(y)(x−y)+12γ∥x−y∥2for all x,y.f(x) \ge f(y) + \nabla f(y)(x - y) + \frac{1}{2\gamma}\|x - y\|^2\quad\text{for all } x, y.f(x)≥f(y)+∇f(y)(x−y)+2γ1​∥x−y∥2for all x,y.

Let x∗x^*x∗ be the minimizer, L={x:f(x)≤f(x0)}\mathcal L = \{x : f(x) \le f(x_0)\}L={x:f(x)≤f(x0​)}, dmax⁡=sup⁡k∥dk∥d_{\max} = \sup_k\|d_k\|dmax​=supk​∥dk​∥, and Lˉ\bar{\mathcal L}Lˉ the set of points within distance μdmax⁡\mu d_{\max}μdmax​ of L\mathcal LL.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.1

Let fff be strongly convex with minimizer x∗x^*x∗, let ∇f\nabla f∇f be Lipschitz continuous on bounded sets, let ηmax⁡<1\eta_{\max} < 1ηmax​<1, let the directions satisfy the direction assumption at every iteration, and let αk≤μ\alpha_k \le \muαk​≤μ for all kkk. Then there is θ∈(0,1)\theta \in (0,1)θ∈(0,1) with

f(xk)−f(x∗)≤θk(f(x0)−f(x∗))for each k.f(x_k) - f(x^*) \le \theta^k\big(f(x_0) - f(x^*)\big)\quad\text{for each } k.f(xk​)−f(x∗)≤θk(f(x0​)−f(x∗))for each k.

The goal fixes no value of θ\thetaθ: it asserts only the existence of a linear rate.

Milestones

In the paper's order of use:

  1. Lemma 1.1: f(xk)≤Ck≤Akf(x_k) \le C_k \le A_kf(xk​)≤Ck​≤Ak​ when gkTdk≤0g_k^{\mathsf T}d_k \le 0gkT​dk​≤0 for each kkk.
  2. Ck+1≤CkC_{k+1} \le C_kCk+1​≤Ck​, so all iterates lie in L\mathcal LL.
  3. (3.4): f(x)−f(x∗)≤γ∥∇f(x)∥2f(x) - f(x^*) \le \gamma\|\nabla f(x)\|^2f(x)−f(x∗)≤γ∥∇f(x)∥2.
  4. (2.15): Qk+1≤1/(1−ηmax⁡)Q_{k+1} \le 1/(1 - \eta_{\max})Qk+1​≤1/(1−ηmax​).
  5. (3.6): f(xk+1)≤Ck−β∥gk∥2f(x_{k+1}) \le C_k - \beta\|g_k\|^2f(xk+1​)≤Ck​−β∥gk​∥2, with
β=min⁡{δμc1ρ, 2δ(1−δ)c12Lρc22, δ(1−σ)c12Lc22}.\beta = \min\left\{\frac{\delta\mu c_1}{\rho},\ \frac{2\delta(1-\delta)c_1^2}{L\rho c_2^2},\ \frac{\delta(1-\sigma)c_1^2}{Lc_2^2}\right\}.β=min{ρδμc1​​, Lρc22​2δ(1−δ)c12​​, Lc22​δ(1−σ)c12​​}.
  1. (3.7): ∥gk+1∥≤b∥gk∥\|g_{k+1}\| \le b\|g_k\|∥gk+1​∥≤b∥gk​∥, b=1+μc2Lb = 1 + \mu c_2 Lb=1+μc2​L.
  2. (3.8): the explicit contraction
Ck+1−f(x∗)≤θ (Ck−f(x∗)),θ=1−βb2(1−ηmax⁡),b2=1β+γb2.C_{k+1} - f(x^*) \le \theta\,(C_k - f(x^*)),\qquad \theta = 1 - \beta b_2(1-\eta_{\max}),\quad b_2 = \frac{1}{\beta + \gamma b^2}.Ck+1​−f(x∗)≤θ(Ck​−f(x∗)),θ=1−βb2​(1−ηmax​),b2​=β+γb21​.

Here LLL is a Lipschitz constant of ∇f\nabla f∇f on Lˉ\bar{\mathcal L}Lˉ. A further result on the same definitions is Theorem 3.2: if f(xk)f(x_k)f(xk​) converges R-linearly with ratio θ<ηmin⁡\theta < \eta_{\min}θ<ηmin​ inside a compact convex set on which fff is strongly convex, then the sufficient decrease condition with reference value CkC_kCk​ holds for all large kkk.

Significance

Theorem 3.1 shows that averaging past function values costs nothing in the rate: on strongly convex functions the nonmonotone method keeps the linear rate of monotone descent, for any direction sequence satisfying the direction assumption (steepest descent, L-BFGS with bounded condition numbers, and so on). Theorem 3.2 is the converse side: for weights close enough to 1, the averaged test eventually accepts the steps of any R-linearly convergent iteration of this kind. The paper contrasts this with the max-based test of Grippo et al.

These results are proved in the paper. As far as the platform catalogue shows, no line search with the Wolfe conditions or a nonmonotone reference value has been formalized. The only related item is a monotone backtracking gradient descent rate, which is a different theorem. Machine-checked proofs would give reusable Lean statements of the nonmonotone Wolfe and Armijo rules and of the averaged reference value. They would also give the explicit constants β\betaβ, bbb and θ\thetaθ in checked form, and a checked record of the repair of the printed statement described below.

Difficulty

The obvious argument would show that f(xk)−f(x∗)f(x_k) - f(x^*)f(xk​)−f(x∗) contracts at each step. It fails: the method is nonmonotone, and f(xk+1)f(x_{k+1})f(xk+1​) may exceed f(xk)f(x_k)f(xk​). The quantity that contracts is Ck−f(x∗)C_k - f(x^*)Ck​−f(x∗), and only CkC_kCk​ is controlled by the line search. The contraction must be derived by relating ∥gk∥2\|g_k\|^2∥gk​∥2 to Ck−f(x∗)C_k - f(x^*)Ck​−f(x∗) in two regimes, and the second regime needs a bound on f(xk+1)−f(x∗)f(x_{k+1}) - f(x^*)f(xk+1​)−f(x∗) from the gradient at the previous iterate. That bound requires the Lipschitz constant on a region containing every point the line search examines, which is why the region Lˉ\bar{\mathcal L}Lˉ and the step bound μ\muμ enter. In Lean, the sufficient decrease (3.6) also rests on the step-length lower bounds of Lemma 2.1 for both rules, including the integer-exponent Armijo rule with its maximality condition.

Formalization scope

Conventions:

  • The space is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), fff is ContDiff ℝ 1, and ∇f(x)d\nabla f(x)d∇f(x)d is ⟪gradient f x, d⟫_ℝ.
  • A run is infinite, uses one rule throughout (Wolfe or Armijo), and has arbitrary directions subject to the stated hypotheses.
  • QkQ_kQk​ and CkC_kCk​ are defined by recursion from the run.
  • The Armijo exponent ranges over Z\mathbb{Z}Z and "largest" is IsGreatest.
  • dmax⁡d_{\max}dmax​ and distances are taken in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], so unbounded directions make Lˉ\bar{\mathcal L}Lˉ the whole space.
  • Strong convexity keeps the paper's constant γ\gammaγ, the inverse modulus.
  • "Lipschitz on bounded sets" means that every bounded set admits a Lipschitz constant for ∇f\nabla f∇f.

Repair of the printed statement: the paper's direction assumption holds only for all sufficiently large kkk, but Theorem 3.1 concludes (3.5) for each kkk, and its proof uses the assumption at every kkk. As printed the theorem is false: d0=0d_0 = 0d0​=0 with the Wolfe step α0=1\alpha_0 = 1α0​=1 gives x1=x0x_1 = x_0x1​=x0​, which violates (3.5) at k=1k = 1k=1 whenever x0≠x∗x_0 \ne x^*x0​=x∗. The goal therefore requires the direction assumption for every k≥0k \ge 0k≥0.

The step bound "there exists μ>0\mu > 0μ>0 with αk≤μ\alpha_k \le \muαk​≤μ" is stated with μ\muμ the algorithm's parameter. For the Armijo rule this holds by construction. The Wolfe rule does not use μ\muμ, so nothing is lost.

Trivializing formalizations are ruled out:

  • the printed hypotheses with "for each kkk" (false, as shown above);
  • a θ\thetaθ allowed to equal 1, or an unspecified constant factor in front of θk\theta^kθk (weaker than (3.5));
  • a globally Lipschitz gradient, or a step bound different from the μ\muμ used to build Lˉ\bar{\mathcal L}Lˉ.

A complete development needs:

  • the NLSA model and Lemma 1.1;
  • the step-length lower bounds of Lemma 2.1 for both rules (via the descent lemma for Lipschitz gradients);
  • the geometric bound on QkQ_kQk​;
  • boundedness of level sets of strongly convex functions.

The NLSA definitions are reusable by any later mission on nonmonotone line searches. Proofs of the milestones in any order are welcome, as are a proof of the counterexample to the printed statement and a proof that the platform theorem ConvexOptimization.strong_convexity_quadratic_lower_bound implies (3.4).

Selected references

  • H. Zhang, W. W. Hager, A Nonmonotone Line Search Technique and Its Application to Unconstrained Optimization, SIAM J. Optim. 14(4):1043–1056, 2004. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623403428208
  • L. Grippo, F. Lampariello, S. Lucidi, A Nonmonotone Line Search Technique for Newton's Method, SIAM J. Numer. Anal. 23(4):707–716, 1986. https://doi.org/10.1137/0723046
  • Y.-H. Dai, On the Nonmonotone Line Search, J. Optim. Theory Appl. 112:315–330, 2002 (reference [4] of the paper).
16 thms6 active usersReviewed
CombinatoricsOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Convexity and Steinitz's Exchange Property II: The Local Supermodularity Theorem for the Concave ConjugateResearch Paper

Motivation

Matroids and their integral generalizations, integral base polytopes, are the combinatorial structures on which the greedy algorithm is exact. Edmonds' theory relates them to submodular and supermodular set functions: a polytope is a base polytope exactly when its support function, restricted to 0/10/10/1 vectors, is supermodular and the greedy formula evaluates it everywhere. Dress and Wenzel's valuated matroids (1990) and Murota's M-concave functions carry the exchange axiom from sets to functions on sets. This paper (Adv. Math. 124, 1996) sets up the resulting theory of discrete concave functions on base sets, later developed into discrete convex analysis (Murota, Discrete Convex Analysis, SIAM 2003).

The question behind this mission is how the set-level correspondence between exchange and supermodularity extends to functions. Section 5 of the paper answers it with the Local Supermodularity Theorem: the exchange property of a function is a supermodularity property of its concave conjugate, holding locally at every point.

Setting

Let VVV be a finite nonempty set, n=∣V∣n=|V|n=∣V∣. For u∈Vu\in Vu∈V let χu∈ZV\chi_u\in\mathbb Z^Vχu​∈ZV be the unit vector, for X⊆VX\subseteq VX⊆V let χX\chi_XχX​ be its characteristic vector, x(X)=∑v∈Xx(v)x(X)=\sum_{v\in X}x(v)x(X)=∑v∈X​x(v), and ⟨p,x⟩=∑vp(v)x(v)\langle p,x\rangle=\sum_v p(v)x(v)⟨p,x⟩=∑v​p(v)x(v). For a finite B⊆ZVB\subseteq\mathbb Z^VB⊆ZV, B‾\overline BB is its convex hull.

A finite integral base set is a finite nonempty B⊆ZVB\subseteq\mathbb Z^VB⊆ZV such that

(B1)x,y∈B, u∈supp⁡+(x−y) ⇒ ∃v∈supp⁡−(x−y): x−χu+χv∈B.\text{(B1)}\quad x,y\in B,\ u\in\operatorname{supp}^+(x-y)\ \Rightarrow\ \exists v\in\operatorname{supp}^-(x-y):\ x-\chi_u+\chi_v\in B.(B1)x,y∈B, u∈supp+(x−y) ⇒ ∃v∈supp−(x−y): x−χu​+χv​∈B.

A function ω:B→R\omega:B\to\mathbb Rω:B→R satisfies the exchange property (EXC) (is M-concave) if for x,y∈Bx,y\in Bx,y∈B and u∈supp⁡+(x−y)u\in\operatorname{supp}^+(x-y)u∈supp+(x−y) there is v∈supp⁡−(x−y)v\in\operatorname{supp}^-(x-y)v∈supp−(x−y) with x−χu+χv, y+χu−χv∈Bx-\chi_u+\chi_v,\ y+\chi_u-\chi_v\in Bx−χu​+χv​, y+χu​−χv​∈B and ω(x)+ω(y)≤ω(x−χu+χv)+ω(y+χu−χv)\omega(x)+\omega(y)\le\omega(x-\chi_u+\chi_v)+\omega(y+\chi_u-\chi_v)ω(x)+ω(y)≤ω(x−χu​+χv​)+ω(y+χu​−χv​). Write ω[p](x)=ω(x)+⟨p,x⟩\omega[p](x)=\omega(x)+\langle p,x\rangleω[p](x)=ω(x)+⟨p,x⟩ and argmax⁡(g)\operatorname{argmax}(g)argmax(g) for the maximizers of ggg on BBB.

The support function of BBB is ψ∘(p)=min⁡{⟨p,x⟩∣x∈B}\psi^\circ(p)=\min\{\langle p,x\rangle\mid x\in B\}ψ∘(p)=min{⟨p,x⟩∣x∈B}. A positively homogeneous h:RV→Rh:\mathbb R^V\to\mathbb Rh:RV→R is "matroidal" if

  • (C1) X↦h(χX)X\mapsto h(\chi_X)X↦h(χX​) is supermodular, and
  • (C2) h(p)=∑j=1n(pj−pj+1) h(χVj)h(p)=\sum_{j=1}^n(p_j-p_{j+1})\,h(\chi_{V_j})h(p)=∑j=1n​(pj​−pj+1​)h(χVj​​) whenever V={v1,…,vn}V=\{v_1,\dots,v_n\}V={v1​,…,vn​} with p(v1)≥⋯≥p(vn)p(v_1)\ge\dots\ge p(v_n)p(v1​)≥⋯≥p(vn​), pj=p(vj)p_j=p(v_j)pj​=p(vj​), Vj={v1,…,vj}V_j=\{v_1,\dots,v_j\}Vj​={v1​,…,vj​}, pn+1=0p_{n+1}=0pn+1​=0.

The concave conjugate is ω∘(p)=min⁡{⟨p,x⟩−ω(x)∣x∈B}\omega^\circ(p)=\min\{\langle p,x\rangle-\omega(x)\mid x\in B\}ω∘(p)=min{⟨p,x⟩−ω(x)∣x∈B}, the concave closure is ω^(b)=inf⁡p{⟨p,b⟩−ω∘(p)}\hat\omega(b)=\inf_p\{\langle p,b\rangle-\omega^\circ(p)\}ω^(b)=infp​{⟨p,b⟩−ω∘(p)}, the subdifferential is ∂ω∘(p0)={b∣ω∘(p)−ω∘(p0)≤⟨p−p0,b⟩ ∀p}\partial\omega^\circ(p_0)=\{b\mid\omega^\circ(p)-\omega^\circ(p_0)\le\langle p-p_0,b\rangle\ \forall p\}∂ω∘(p0​)={b∣ω∘(p)−ω∘(p0​)≤⟨p−p0​,b⟩ ∀p}, and the localization of ω∘\omega^\circω∘ at p0p_0p0​ is L^(ω∘,p0)(p)=inf⁡{⟨p,b⟩∣b∈∂ω∘(p0)}\hat L(\omega^\circ,p_0)(p)=\inf\{\langle p,b\rangle\mid b\in\partial\omega^\circ(p_0)\}L^(ω∘,p0​)(p)=inf{⟨p,b⟩∣b∈∂ω∘(p0​)}.

Formalization targets

Goal: the Local Supermodularity Theorem (Theorem 5.3, corrected)

For ω\omegaω on a finite integral base set BBB,

ω satisfies (EXC)  ⟺  (ω=ω^ on B) and (L^(ω∘,p0) is "matroidal" for every p0∈RV).\omega\ \text{satisfies (EXC)}\iff\Big(\omega=\hat\omega\ \text{on}\ B\Big)\ \text{and}\ \Big(\hat L(\omega^\circ,p_0)\ \text{is "matroidal" for every}\ p_0\in\mathbb R^V\Big).ω satisfies (EXC)⟺(ω=ω^ on B) and (L^(ω∘,p0​) is "matroidal" for every p0​∈RV).

The printed Theorem 5.3 has only the second condition on the right. Its "only if" direction holds as printed; its "if" direction is false without the first condition, and a separate item of the mission states the counterexample: B={(2,0),(1,1),(0,2)}B=\{(2,0),(1,1),(0,2)\}B={(2,0),(1,1),(0,2)}, ω=(0,−10,0)\omega=(0,-10,0)ω=(0,−10,0).

Milestones

  1. Theorem 2.1: (B1) is equivalent to BBB being the integer points of an integral submodular (equivalently, supermodular) system, whose defining function is determined by BBB.
  2. Theorem 5.1: if B=ZV∩B‾B=\mathbb Z^V\cap\overline BB=ZV∩B, then BBB satisfies (B1) iff ψ∘\psi^\circψ∘ is "matroidal".
  3. Lemma 5.2: sums of "matroidal" functions are "matroidal".
  4. Theorem 4.4: (EXC) holds iff every argmax⁡(ω[p])\operatorname{argmax}(\omega[p])argmax(ω[p]) satisfies (B1).
  5. Eq. (5.12): L^(ω∘,p0)(p)=min⁡{⟨p,x⟩∣x∈argmax⁡(ω[−p0])}\hat L(\omega^\circ,p_0)(p)=\min\{\langle p,x\rangle\mid x\in\operatorname{argmax}(\omega[-p_0])\}L^(ω∘,p0​)(p)=min{⟨p,x⟩∣x∈argmax(ω[−p0​])}.

Significance

The result. Theorem 5.3 is the function-level version of Theorem 5.1. Condition (C1) is a supermodularity condition, so the theorem expresses (EXC) as "a collection of local supermodularity" properties of ω∘\omega^\circω∘, in the same way that (B1) corresponds to supermodularity of a support function. In the paper this characterization of the conjugate side underlies the Fenchel-type duality of Section 6, and more generally the conjugacy between M-concave and L-convex functions in discrete convex analysis.

The formalization. No part of this theory is formalized in Lean or on this platform: base sets, (EXC), "matroidal" functions and concave conjugates of functions on base sets are all new. The mission also corrects the published statement: the reduction from localizations to base sets needs every integer point of conv⁡(argmax⁡ ω[−p0])\operatorname{conv}(\operatorname{argmax}\,\omega[-p_0])conv(argmaxω[−p0​]) to be a maximizer, and the concave-closure condition supplies this. A machine-checked proof would settle both the corrected theorem and the counterexample. Theorem 2.1 and Lemma 5.2 are classical but have no formal proof either.

Difficulty

ω∘\omega^\circω∘ depends only on the concave closure ω^\hat\omegaω^, so any characterization of (EXC) through ω∘\omega^\circω∘ alone cannot see values of ω\omegaω below ω^\hat\omegaω^. That is why the goal needs the extra clause. The "only if" direction needs the full theory of Section 4: M-concave functions coincide with their concave closure, and all their maximizer sets are base sets. Theorem 5.1 needs the greedy algorithm on integral base polytopes, together with the fact that the base polytope of an integral supermodular function has integral vertices. Theorem 2.1 is the folklore statement that polyhedral and exchange descriptions agree, and the paper does not prove it. Eq. (5.12) needs the subdifferential of a finite minimum of affine functions to be the convex hull of the active gradients, stated globally rather than only near p0p_0p0​.

Formalization scope

Integer vectors are V → ℤ, real vectors V → ℝ, with [Fintype V] [DecidableEq V] [Nonempty V]. A finite subset of ZV\mathbb Z^VZV is a Finset (V → ℤ). A function on BBB is a total function (V → ℤ) → ℝ whose values off BBB are never used. The mission commits to the following readings:

  • Minima. ψ∘\psi^\circψ∘, ω∘\omega^\circω∘ are real infima over the finite set BBB, hence minima for nonempty BBB (every statement has BBB nonempty). ω^\hat\omegaω^ is a real infimum used only at points of BBB, where it is bounded below.
  • Localization. L^\hat LL^ is a real sInf over the subdifferential, defined by (5.8)–(5.9) exactly, not by the formula (5.12). Eq. (5.12) is stated with IsLeast, so it asserts attainment, not just the value.
  • (C2). It is required for every bijection Fin n ≃ V along which ppp is non-increasing. This is equivalent to "for some" such indexing. "Matroidal" includes positive homogeneity but not concavity.
  • Theorem 2.1. The page's "∀X⊂V\forall X\subset V∀X⊂V" is read as all X⊆VX\subseteq VX⊆V. The set functions are integer-valued, and "Moreover" is read strongly: every fff (resp. ggg) as in (b) (resp. (c)) equals the displayed max (resp. min).
  • Theorem 4.4. "argmax⁡(ω[p])‾\overline{\operatorname{argmax}(\omega[p])}argmax(ω[p])​ is an integral base polytope" is read as "argmax⁡(ω[p])\operatorname{argmax}(\omega[p])argmax(ω[p]) satisfies (B1)", following Lemma 4.3 and the proof of Theorem 5.3. The literal convex-hull reading makes the "if" direction false (same counterexample).
  • Theorem 5.1 keeps the page's hypothesis B=ZV∩B‾B=\mathbb Z^V\cap\overline BB=ZV∩B.

Trivializing formalizations are ruled out. Defining L^\hat LL^ by (5.12) would reduce the goal to Theorems 4.4 and 5.1. A "matroidal" without (C2) would be satisfied by support functions of non-base sets. An ω∘\omega^\circω∘ taken as a supremum would reverse the sign conventions.

The development needs: the greedy algorithm and integrality for integral base polytopes, supergradients of polyhedral concave functions, and the Section 4 results of the paper (concave closure of M-concave functions, Lemma 4.3). The base-set and "matroidal" layers can be reused beyond this mission. Proofs of any milestone, of the counterexample, and a proof of the "only if" direction on its own are all welcome.

Selected references

  • K. Murota, Convexity and Steinitz's exchange property, Advances in Mathematics 124 (1996), 272–311. https://doi.org/10.1006/aima.1996.0084
  • A. W. M. Dress, W. Wenzel, Valuated matroids: a new look at the greedy algorithm, Applied Mathematics Letters 3 (1990), 33–35.
  • S. Fujishige, Submodular Functions and Optimization, 2nd ed., Annals of Discrete Mathematics 58, Elsevier, 2005.
  • L. Lovász, Submodular functions and convexity, in Mathematical Programming: The State of the Art, Springer, 1983, 235–257. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-68874-4_10
  • K. Murota, Discrete Convex Analysis, SIAM, 2003. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898718508
15 thms6 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: Shuze Chen

Convex Optimization VI: Self-Concordance and the Barrier MethodTextbook

Why do interior-point methods solve convex programs in O(mlog⁡(1/ε))O(\sqrt{m}\log(1/\varepsilon))O(m​log(1/ε)) Newton steps? Nesterov and Nemirovskii's answer is self-concordance: a convex function whose third derivative is controlled by its second, ∣φ′′′(t)∣≤2 φ′′(t)3/2|\varphi'''(t)| \le 2\,\varphi''(t)^{3/2}∣φ′′′(t)∣≤2φ′′(t)3/2 along every line, admits a Newton analysis with absolute constants and no condition number — and the logarithmic barrier is self-concordant. This mission formalizes §9.6 and Chapter 11 of Boyd & Vandenberghe: the self-concordance calculus, the Newton-decrement analysis, the duality gap m/tm/tm/t along the central path, the per-centering work bound m(μ−1−log⁡μ)/γ+cm(\mu - 1 - \log\mu)/\gamma + cm(μ−1−logμ)/γ+c, and the crown result — with the aggressive schedule μ=1+1/m\mu = 1 + 1/\sqrt{m}μ=1+1/m​ the barrier method reaches duality gap ε\varepsilonε after

⌈m log⁡2(m/(t(0)ε))⌉\Bigl\lceil \sqrt{m}\,\log_2\bigl(m/(t^{(0)}\varepsilon)\bigr)\Bigr\rceil⌈m​log2​(m/(t(0)ε))⌉

centering steps, each of uniformly bounded Newton cost.

19 thms6 active users
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchOptimizationProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Worst-Case Value-At-Risk and Robust Portfolio Optimization: A Conic Programming Approach 1: Exact Worst-Case VaR under Known Mean and Covariance and Its SDP RepresentationsResearch Paper

Motivation

Value-at-Risk (VaR) is the standard regulatory measure of downside risk of a portfolio: the loss level that is exceeded only with a prescribed small probability ε\varepsilonε. Computing it requires the full distribution of asset returns, which is rarely known. In practice one estimates a mean vector and a covariance matrix and then assumes a Gaussian distribution, which understates the probability of large losses when returns are heavy-tailed or skewed.

El Ghaoui, Oks and Oustry (Oper. Res. 51(4), 2003) replace the distributional assumption by a worst case: the VaR is computed against every distribution consistent with the known moments. For known mean and covariance they obtain an exact closed form and several semidefinite (SDP) representations of this worst-case VaR. The SDP forms are what make the approach extend to moment uncertainty (moments only known to lie in a set, §2.2 of the paper) and to robust portfolio optimization. The equivalence between the probabilistic statement and the closed form is also a multivariate one-sided Chebyshev bound, related to Bertsimas and Popescu (SIAM J. Optim. 15(3), 2005; working paper 2000).

Setting

There are nnn assets. Their returns over one period form a random vector x∈Rnx \in \mathbb R^nx∈Rn, and a portfolio w∈Rnw \in \mathbb R^nw∈Rn earns r(w,x)=w⊤xr(w,x) = w^\top xr(w,x)=w⊤x. The paper restricts www to an admissible set that does not contain 000; only w≠0w \neq 0w=0 is used.

The distribution of xxx is unknown except for its mean x^∈Rn\hat x \in \mathbb R^nx^∈Rn and covariance matrix Γ\GammaΓ, with Γ≻0\Gamma \succ 0Γ≻0 (positive definite). Let P\mathcal PP be the set of all probability distributions on Rn\mathbb R^nRn with these two moments. For a loss level γ\gammaγ, the loss set is S={x∣γ≤−x⊤w}\mathcal S = \{x \mid \gamma \le -x^\top w\}S={x∣γ≤−x⊤w}. The worst-case VaR at level ε\varepsilonε is (Eq. (4))

VP(w)=min⁡{γ  :  sup⁡P∈PP(S)≤ε}.V_{\mathcal P}(w) = \min\Big\{\gamma \;:\; \sup_{P\in\mathcal P} P(\mathcal S) \le \varepsilon\Big\}.VP​(w)=min{γ:P∈Psup​P(S)≤ε}.

Further notation: κ(ε)=(1−ε)/ε\kappa(\varepsilon) = \sqrt{(1-\varepsilon)/\varepsilon}κ(ε)=(1−ε)/ε​ (Eq. (8)); for symmetric matrices, A⪰BA \succeq BA⪰B means A−BA - BA−B is positive semidefinite and ⟨A,B⟩=Tr⁡(AB)\langle A, B\rangle = \operatorname{Tr}(AB)⟨A,B⟩=Tr(AB). The second-moment matrix is (Eq. (6))

Σ=[Sx^x^⊤1],S=Γ+x^x^⊤.\Sigma = \begin{bmatrix} S & \hat x \\ \hat x^\top & 1\end{bmatrix}, \qquad S = \Gamma + \hat x\hat x^\top.Σ=[Sx^⊤​x^1​],S=Γ+x^x^⊤.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1 (pp. 545–546)

For Γ≻0\Gamma \succ 0Γ≻0, w≠0w \neq 0w=0, ε∈(0,1)\varepsilon \in (0,1)ε∈(0,1) and γ∈R\gamma \in \mathbb Rγ∈R, the following five propositions are equivalent:

  1. sup⁡P∈PP{γ≤−w⊤x}≤ε\sup_{P \in \mathcal P} P\{\gamma \le -w^\top x\} \le \varepsilonsupP∈P​P{γ≤−w⊤x}≤ε;
  2. κ(ε) ∥Γ1/2w∥2−x^⊤w≤γ\kappa(\varepsilon)\,\|\Gamma^{1/2} w\|_2 - \hat x^\top w \le \gammaκ(ε)∥Γ1/2w∥2​−x^⊤w≤γ;
  3. there are a symmetric MMM and τ∈R\tau \in \mathbb Rτ∈R with ⟨M,Σ⟩≤τε\langle M, \Sigma\rangle \le \tau\varepsilon⟨M,Σ⟩≤τε, M⪰0M \succeq 0M⪰0, τ≥0\tau \ge 0τ≥0, and M+[0ww⊤−τ+2γ]⪰0M + \begin{bmatrix} 0 & w\\ w^\top & -\tau + 2\gamma\end{bmatrix} \succeq 0M+[0w⊤​w−τ+2γ​]⪰0;
  4. every xxx with [Γx−x^(x−x^)⊤κ(ε)2]⪰0\begin{bmatrix}\Gamma & x - \hat x\\ (x-\hat x)^\top & \kappa(\varepsilon)^2\end{bmatrix} \succeq 0[Γ(x−x^)⊤​x−x^κ(ε)2​]⪰0 satisfies −x⊤w≤γ-x^\top w \le \gamma−x⊤w≤γ;
  5. there are a symmetric Λ\LambdaΛ and v∈Rv \in \mathbb Rv∈R with ⟨Λ,Γ⟩+κ(ε)2v−x^⊤w≤γ\langle \Lambda, \Gamma\rangle + \kappa(\varepsilon)^2 v - \hat x^\top w \le \gamma⟨Λ,Γ⟩+κ(ε)2v−x^⊤w≤γ and [Λw/2w⊤/2v]⪰0\begin{bmatrix}\Lambda & w/2\\ w^\top/2 & v\end{bmatrix} \succeq 0[Λw⊤/2​w/2v​]⪰0.

In particular

VP(w)=κ(ε) ∥Γ1/2w∥2−x^⊤w.V_{\mathcal P}(w) = \kappa(\varepsilon)\,\|\Gamma^{1/2}w\|_2 - \hat x^\top w.VP​(w)=κ(ε)∥Γ1/2w∥2​−x^⊤w.

Milestones (the steps of the paper's proof)

  • Condition C.1 (l(x)=[x⊤ 1]M[x⊤ 1]⊤≥0l(x) = [x^\top\,1] M [x^\top\,1]^\top \ge 0l(x)=[x⊤1]M[x⊤1]⊤≥0 for all xxx) is equivalent to M⪰0M \succeq 0M⪰0 (p. 546).
  • Conditions C.1 and C.2 are equivalent to the existence of τ≥0\tau \ge 0τ≥0 with M⪰0M \succeq 0M⪰0 and M+[0τwτw⊤−1+2τγ]⪰0M + \begin{bmatrix} 0 & \tau w\\ \tau w^\top & -1+2\tau\gamma\end{bmatrix} \succeq 0M+[0τw⊤​τw−1+2τγ​]⪰0 (p. 546).
  • The worst-case probability sup⁡P∈PP(S)\sup_{P\in\mathcal P} P(\mathcal S)supP∈P​P(S) equals the value of the SDP inf⁡⟨M,Σ⟩\inf \langle M, \Sigma\rangleinf⟨M,Σ⟩ under the constraints above (Eq. (14), pp. 546–547).
  • The Schur-complement reduction (19)–(20) of the constraints of the dual problem (18) (p. 547).
  • The closed form of ϕ(y)\phi(y)ϕ(y) and its maximum at y=εy = \varepsilony=ε (p. 547).
  • Condition (10) describes the ellipsoid {x∣(x−x^)⊤Γ−1(x−x^)≤κ(ε)2}\{x \mid (x-\hat x)^\top\Gamma^{-1}(x-\hat x) \le \kappa(\varepsilon)^2\}{x∣(x−x^)⊤Γ−1(x−x^)≤κ(ε)2}, and the maximal loss −x⊤w-x^\top w−x⊤w over it is κ(ε)w⊤Γw−x^⊤w\kappa(\varepsilon)\sqrt{w^\top\Gamma w} - \hat x^\top wκ(ε)w⊤Γw​−x^⊤w (p. 546).

Significance

The result. Proposition 2 turns the worst-case VaR into a second-order cone function of www, so minimizing it over a polytope of portfolios is a second-order cone program (Eq. (12)). The SDP forms 3 and 5 are the basis of the paper's §2.2–§3: they extend, with the moments only known to lie in a convex set, to a single SDP whose value is the worst-case VaR over that set. Proposition 4 gives a deterministic reading: the worst-case VaR is the largest loss when the return vector is only known to lie in an ellipsoid, which connects distributional robustness to robust optimization with ellipsoidal uncertainty.

Formalizing it. The result is proved in the paper, with two imported steps: strong duality for the moment problem (Smith 1995; Bonnans and Shapiro 2000) and a Slater-type strong duality for the one-constraint quadratic condition. No machine-checked version is known. A formal proof would supply these steps with explicit hypotheses and would produce a Lean statement of the multivariate one-sided Chebyshev (Cantelli) bound with tightness over the full moment class.

Difficulty

The matrix equivalences (2 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5 and 2 ⇔ 3) are Schur complements and finite-dimensional SDP duality. The difficulty is Proposition 1. The upper bound (Cantelli's inequality for w⊤xw^\top xw⊤x) handles one direction, but the converse requires tightness: for every γ\gammaγ below the closed form, a distribution on Rn\mathbb R^nRn with exactly the prescribed mean and full covariance matrix Γ\GammaΓ that puts probability more than ε\varepsilonε on the loss set. A scalar extremal distribution for w⊤xw^\top xw⊤x does not by itself have the right covariance in the other directions, and a Gaussian does not reach the bound. The paper's route through the moment problem instead needs strong duality between a supremum over measures and an infimum over matrices, which is where the positive definiteness of Σ\SigmaΣ enters.

Formalization scope

  • Vectors live in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n); x⊤wx^\top wx⊤w is the inner product, and matrices are Matrix (Fin n) (Fin n) ℝ. Matrices of size n+1n+1n+1 are indexed by Fin n ⊕ Fin 1 and built with Matrix.fromBlocks (the helper bordered A v c is [[A,v],[v⊤,c]][[A, v],[v^\top, c]][[A,v],[v⊤,c]]). A⪰0A \succeq 0A⪰0 is PosSemidef, Γ≻0\Gamma \succ 0Γ≻0 is PosDef, ⟨A,B⟩\langle A, B\rangle⟨A,B⟩ is (A * B).trace, and ∥Γ1/2w∥2\|\Gamma^{1/2}w\|_2∥Γ1/2w∥2​ is written w⊤Γw\sqrt{w^\top\Gamma w}w⊤Γw​.
  • The class P\mathcal PP (HasMeanCov) contains every Borel probability measure on Rn\mathbb R^nRn whose coordinates are square-integrable, with mean x^\hat xx^ and centred covariance Γ\GammaΓ. It is not restricted to densities or to Gaussians: the Gaussian class gives a different constant, −Φ−1(ε)-\Phi^{-1}(\varepsilon)−Φ−1(ε).
  • Sup, inf and max: "sup⁡P∈PP(S)≤ε\sup_{P\in\mathcal P}P(\mathcal S) \le \varepsilonsupP∈P​P(S)≤ε" is stated as "P(S)≤εP(\mathcal S) \le \varepsilonP(S)≤ε for every P∈PP \in \mathcal PP∈P". The worst-case probability SDP is stated as IsLUB/IsGLB of one real number (no attainment is claimed). The maxima over vvv, over y∈[ε,1]y \in [\varepsilon,1]y∈[ε,1] and over the ellipsoid are IsGreatest.
  • Corrections to the printed statement. The paper prints ε∈(0,1]\varepsilon \in (0,1]ε∈(0,1]; at ε=1\varepsilon = 1ε=1 Proposition 1 holds for every γ\gammaγ while Propositions 2–5 require γ≥−x^⊤w\gamma \ge -\hat x^\top wγ≥−x^⊤w, so the goal assumes 0<ε<10 < \varepsilon < 10<ε<1. The goal also assumes w≠0w \neq 0w=0, the paper's standing assumption; with w=0w = 0w=0, γ=0\gamma = 0γ=0 Proposition 1 fails and Proposition 2 holds. Milestones that remain true at ε=1\varepsilon = 1ε=1 keep ε≤1\varepsilon \le 1ε≤1.
  • A goal that omits Proposition 1 would only be matrix algebra and is not this theorem. The five-way equivalence must be proved with the probabilistic statement included.
  • Useful infrastructure, reusable beyond this mission: the homogenization lemma for quadratic functions, the S-lemma with one affine constraint, the Schur-complement criteria for bordered PSD matrices, and duality for the moment problem. Proofs of any milestone, and of lemmas building a distribution with prescribed mean and covariance, are welcome.

Selected references

  • L. El Ghaoui, M. Oks, F. Oustry, Worst-Case Value-at-Risk and Robust Portfolio Optimization: A Conic Programming Approach, Operations Research 51(4):543–556, 2003. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.51.4.543.16101
  • D. Bertsimas, I. Popescu, Optimal Inequalities in Probability Theory: A Convex Optimization Approach, SIAM J. Optim. 15(3):780–804, 2005. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623401399903
  • J. E. Smith, Generalized Chebychev Inequalities: Theory and Applications in Decision Analysis, Operations Research 43(5):807–825, 1995. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.43.5.807
  • J. F. Bonnans, A. Shapiro, Perturbation Analysis of Optimization Problems, Springer, 2000. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4612-1394-9
  • L. Vandenberghe, S. Boyd, K. Comanor, Generalized Chebyshev Bounds via Semidefinite Programming, SIAM Review 49(1):52–64, 2007. https://doi.org/10.1137/S0036144504440543
8 thms5 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Machine LearningOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Logarithmic Regret Algorithms for Online Convex Optimization 1: Logarithmic Regret of Online Gradient DescentResearch Paper

Motivation

Online convex optimization is a repeated game between a learner and an adversary. In each round t=1,…,Tt=1,\dots,Tt=1,…,T the learner commits to a point xtx_txt​ of a convex set P⊆Rn\mathcal P\subseteq\mathbb R^nP⊆Rn; only then is a convex cost function ftf_tft​ revealed, and the learner pays ft(xt)f_t(x_t)ft​(xt​). The learner is judged by its regret: its total cost minus the total cost of the best fixed point chosen in hindsight. The model covers online portfolio selection, online regression, prediction with expert advice and the analysis of stochastic gradient methods, and it is the standard language of online learning theory.

Zinkevich (ICML 2003) showed that projected gradient descent with step sizes of order 1/t1/\sqrt t1/t​ has regret O(GDT)O(GD\sqrt T)O(GDT​) for any convex costs with gradients bounded by GGG on a set of diameter DDD, and this rate cannot be improved for linear costs. Hazan, Agarwal and Kale (Machine Learning 69, 2007) asked what curvature buys. Their first result, the subject of this mission, is that the same algorithm with the faster step sizes 1/(Ht)1/(Ht)1/(Ht) has regret only logarithmic in TTT once every cost function is HHH-strongly convex. The paper's other three results (the Online Newton Step, Follow the Approximate Leader and Exponentially Weighted Online Optimization, for exp-concave costs) are the subject of the other missions of this series.

Setting

Fix n∈Nn\in\mathbb Nn∈N and a nonempty, closed, bounded, convex set P⊆Rn\mathcal P\subseteq\mathbb R^nP⊆Rn, with the Euclidean norm ∥⋅∥2\|\cdot\|_2∥⋅∥2​ (§2.1, p. 171).

  • Cost functions. A sequence f1,f2,⋯:Rn→Rf_1,f_2,\dots:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb Rf1​,f2​,⋯:Rn→R. Write ∇ft(x)\nabla f_t(x)∇ft​(x) for the gradient and ∇2ft(x)\nabla^2 f_t(x)∇2ft​(x) for the Hessian.
  • Gradient bound. A number GGG with ∥∇ft(x)∥2≤G\|\nabla f_t(x)\|_2\le G∥∇ft​(x)∥2​≤G for all x∈Px\in\mathcal Px∈P and all rounds ttt (p. 172).
  • HHH-strong convexity (p. 172). For H>0H>0H>0, fff is HHH-strongly convex on P\mathcal PP when it is twice differentiable and ∇2f(x)⪰HIn\nabla^2 f(x)\succeq H I_n∇2f(x)⪰HIn​ for every x∈Px\in\mathcal Px∈P, i.e. v⊤∇2f(x)v≥H∥v∥22v^\top\nabla^2 f(x)v\ge H\|v\|_2^2v⊤∇2f(x)v≥H∥v∥22​ for all vvv.
  • Euclidean projection. ΠP(y)\Pi_{\mathcal P}(y)ΠP​(y) is the point of P\mathcal PP nearest to yyy, ΠP(y)=arg⁡min⁡x∈P∥x−y∥2\Pi_{\mathcal P}(y)=\arg\min_{x\in\mathcal P}\|x-y\|_2ΠP​(y)=argminx∈P​∥x−y∥2​ (IsProj P y z).
  • Online Gradient Descent (Fig. 1, p. 174), with step sizes η1,η2,…\eta_1,\eta_2,\dotsη1​,η2​,…: x1∈Px_1\in\mathcal Px1​∈P is arbitrary, and in iteration t>1t>1t>1
xt=ΠP(xt−1−ηt∇ft−1(xt−1))x_t=\Pi_{\mathcal P}\bigl(x_{t-1}-\eta_t\nabla f_{t-1}(x_{t-1})\bigr)xt​=ΠP​(xt−1​−ηt​∇ft−1​(xt−1​))

(IsOGDRun P η f x).

  • Regret (p. 171): RegretT=∑t=1Tft(xt)−min⁡x∈P∑t=1Tft(x)\mathrm{Regret}_T=\sum_{t=1}^T f_t(x_t)-\min_{x\in\mathcal P}\sum_{t=1}^T f_t(x)RegretT​=∑t=1T​ft​(xt​)−minx∈P​∑t=1T​ft​(x), and RegretT(OGD)\mathrm{Regret}_T(\mathrm{OGD})RegretT​(OGD) is its supremum over all cost sequences.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1 (p. 175)

For H>0H>0H>0, cost functions that are HHH-strongly convex on P\mathcal PP with gradients bounded by GGG on P\mathcal PP, and any run of Online Gradient Descent whose step after round ttt is ηt+1=1/(Ht)\eta_{t+1}=1/(Ht)ηt+1​=1/(Ht), for every T≥1T\ge1T≥1 and every u∈Pu\in\mathcal Pu∈P:

∑t=1T(ft(xt)−ft(u)) ≤ G22H (1+log⁡T).\sum_{t=1}^{T}\bigl(f_t(x_t)-f_t(u)\bigr)\ \le\ \frac{G^2}{2H}\,\bigl(1+\log T\bigr).t=1∑T​(ft​(xt​)−ft​(u)) ≤ 2HG2​(1+logT).

This is LogRegretOCO.OGD.ogd_regret_bound. The constant is the paper's, and at T=1T=1T=1 the bound reads G2/(2H)G^2/(2H)G2/(2H).

Milestones

  1. Eq. (1), the strong-convexity inequality: for x,y∈Px,y\in\mathcal Px,y∈P, 2(f(x)−f(y))≤2∇f(x)⊤(x−y)−H∥y−x∥222(f(x)-f(y))\le 2\nabla f(x)^\top(x-y)-H\|y-x\|_2^22(f(x)−f(y))≤2∇f(x)⊤(x−y)−H∥y−x∥22​.
  2. Lemma 8 with A=InA=I_nA=In​: for a convex P\mathcal PP, z=ΠP(y)z=\Pi_{\mathcal P}(y)z=ΠP​(y) and a∈Pa\in\mathcal Pa∈P, ∥y−a∥22≥∥z−a∥22\|y-a\|_2^2\ge\|z-a\|_2^2∥y−a∥22​≥∥z−a∥22​. This is already on the platform, proved, as UnderstandingML.projection_lemma, and is reused as a reference item.
  3. Eq. (2), the one-step inequality: for z=ΠP(x−ηg)z=\Pi_{\mathcal P}(x-\eta g)z=ΠP​(x−ηg), η>0\eta>0η>0, ∥g∥2≤G\|g\|_2\le G∥g∥2​≤G and u∈Pu\in\mathcal Pu∈P, 2g⊤(x−u)≤(∥x−u∥22−∥z−u∥22)/η+ηG22g^\top(x-u)\le(\|x-u\|_2^2-\|z-u\|_2^2)/\eta+\eta G^22g⊤(x−u)≤(∥x−u∥22​−∥z−u∥22​)/η+ηG2.

The last step of the argument is the harmonic-sum bound ∑t=1T1/t≤1+log⁡T\sum_{t=1}^T 1/t\le 1+\log T∑t=1T​1/t≤1+logT, which Mathlib already provides (harmonic_le_one_add_log).

Significance

The result. Theorem 1 separates two regimes of online convex optimization: Θ(T)\Theta(\sqrt T)Θ(T​) regret for general convex costs and O(log⁡T)O(\log T)O(logT) for strongly convex ones, with an algorithm that costs one gradient and one projection per round. Through the online-to-batch conversion, the same step-size schedule gives the O(log⁡T/T)O(\log T/T)O(logT/T) rate of stochastic gradient descent on strongly convex objectives. The theorem is also the reference point for the paper's weaker exp-concavity assumption, under which the other three algorithms obtain O(nlog⁡T)O(n\log T)O(nlogT) regret.

Formalizing it. The result is proved and well known; what this mission adds is a machine-checked proof with the paper's exact constant. The Prove2Me platform holds a statement of the textbook version of this theorem (Hazan, Introduction to Online Convex Optimization, Theorem 3.3), OnlineConvexOpt.FirstOrder.online_gradient_descent_strongly_convex_regret, but it is Disproved: its regret is written with a real infimum over the decision set, which Lean evaluates to a junk value. No proved version of the logarithmic bound is on the platform. The strong-convexity inequality, the one-step projected-gradient inequality and the telescoping argument are reusable by every later formalization of gradient methods on the platform.

Difficulty

The argument is short, and its difficulty lies in the bookkeeping. The telescoping sum of squared distances cancels exactly only with the right step-size indexing: the step taken after round ttt must be 1/(Ht)1/(Ht)1/(Ht). Reading Fig. 1 literally with ηt=1/(Ht)\eta_t=1/(Ht)ηt​=1/(Ht) makes the step after round ttt equal to 1/(H(t+1))1/(H(t+1))1/(H(t+1)), and the sum then leaves an uncancelled term H2∥x1−x∗∥22\frac H2\|x_1-x^*\|_2^22H​∥x1​−x∗∥22​ that the printed bound does not contain. Strong convexity is a statement about the Hessian, so the curvature inequality (1) needs a second-order Taylor expansion along a segment of P\mathcal PP; convexity of P\mathcal PP keeps the segment inside the set where the Hessian bound holds. The projection step needs the obtuse-angle property of Euclidean projection onto a convex set.

Formalization scope

Points are EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), so ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥ is the Euclidean norm (the sup norm of Fin n → ℝ would change the gradient bound). Cost functions are functions on all of Rn\mathbb R^nRn, as the paper's use of gradients and Hessians presupposes; the gradient is Mathlib's gradient, and the Hessian quadratic form is the second Fréchet derivative applied to (v,v)(v,v)(v,v). Rounds are 1-based: x 0, f 0 and η 1 are never read, and sums run over Finset.Icc 1 T. The run of the algorithm is a predicate on the whole trajectory, required at every round; the projection is a predicate (nearest point of P\mathcal PP), which is unique for nonempty closed convex P\mathcal PP.

Choices and corrections relative to the printed text:

  • Step-size index. Theorem 1 prints "step sizes ηt=1Ht\eta_t=\frac1{Ht}ηt​=Ht1​", while its proof sets ηt+1=1/(Ht)\eta_{t+1}=1/(Ht)ηt+1​=1/(Ht) for the step after round ttt. The goal uses the proof's indexing, as a hypothesis η (t + 1) = 1 / (H * t) for t≥1t\ge1t≥1 on the step sizes of Fig. 1.
  • Eq. (2). The paper prints "5∇t⊤(xt−x∗)5\nabla_t^\top(x_t-x^*)5∇t⊤​(xt​−x∗)"; the 555 is a typo for 222, and the milestone states 222. The verbatim milestone text keeps the printed 555.
  • Regret. Regret is stated against every comparator u∈Pu\in\mathcal Pu∈P; the minimum over the compact set P\mathcal PP is attained, so this is the paper's statement. The expectation in the paper's regret is vacuous for this deterministic algorithm, and the supremum over cost sequences is the universal quantifier over fff.
  • Hypotheses. Strong convexity and the gradient bound are required for the rounds 1,…,T1,\dots,T1,…,T only. Convexity of each ftf_tft​, a standing assumption of §2.2, follows from HHH-strong convexity on the convex set P\mathcal PP and is not added. No diameter bound enters Theorem 1.

A regret bound written with a real ⨅/sInf over P\mathcal PP, or a bound for an arbitrary sequence satisfying Eq. (2) instead of a run of the paper's algorithm, would not be Theorem 1; the goal quantifies over every comparator in P\mathcal PP and carries the run predicate, the Hessian hypothesis and the gradient bound. The hypotheses are jointly satisfiable: on the closed unit ball, ft(x)=H2∥x∥22f_t(x)=\frac H2\|x\|_2^2ft​(x)=2H​∥x∥22​ with G=HG=HG=H meets all of them.

Contributions welcome: proofs of the two inequalities and of the goal; a general projection lemma for positive semidefinite AAA (Lemma 8 in full, needed by the Online Newton Step mission) is reusable beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • E. Hazan, A. Agarwal, S. Kale, Logarithmic regret algorithms for online convex optimization, Machine Learning 69 (2007), 169–192. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10994-007-5016-8
  • M. Zinkevich, Online convex programming and generalized infinitesimal gradient ascent, ICML 2003. https://www.aaai.org/Papers/ICML/2003/ICML03-120.pdf
  • E. Hazan, Introduction to Online Convex Optimization, 2nd ed., MIT Press 2022 (Theorem 3.3). https://arxiv.org/abs/1909.05207
  • S. Shalev-Shwartz, S. Ben-David, Understanding Machine Learning: From Theory to Algorithms, Cambridge University Press 2014 (Lemma 14.9, the projection lemma). https://doi.org/10.1017/CBO9781107298019
5 thms5 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: Shuze Chen

Convex Optimization III: Conic Duality and the S-procedureTextbook

Two quadratic functions can be compared losslessly. The S-procedure says that, when the constraint is strictly feasible, the implication

q1(x)≤0  ⟹  q2(x)≤0,qk(x)=xTFkx+2gkTx+hk,q_1(x) \le 0 \;\Longrightarrow\; q_2(x) \le 0, \qquad q_k(x) = x^{T}F_k x + 2g_k^{T}x + h_k,q1​(x)≤0⟹q2​(x)≤0,qk​(x)=xTFk​x+2gkT​x+hk​,

holds if and only if a single nonnegative multiplier certifies it as a matrix inequality, λ[F1g1g1Th1]⪰[F2g2g2Th2]\lambda \begin{bmatrix} F_1 & g_1 \\ g_1^{T} & h_1\end{bmatrix} \succeq \begin{bmatrix} F_2 & g_2 \\ g_2^{T} & h_2\end{bmatrix}λ[F1​g1T​​g1​h1​​]⪰[F2​g2T​​g2​h2​​] for some λ≥0\lambda \ge 0λ≥0. It is a cornerstone of control theory, trust-region methods and robust optimization, and a rare case in which a nonconvex problem has zero duality gap. The route runs through the theory this mission builds from Boyd & Vandenberghe §5.8–5.9 and Appendix B: strong alternatives for convex inequality systems, cone-program strong duality under a generalized Slater condition, semidefinite programming duality, the LMI theorems of alternatives, and the hidden convexity of the joint range of two quadratic forms.

17 thms5 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: Shuze Chen

Convex Optimization I: Prékopa's TheoremTextbook

Log-concave functions are the meeting point of convex analysis and probability: densities of Gaussian, exponential, uniform and Wishart distributions are all log-concave, and countless facts of applied probability flow from one structural theorem — integrating out variables preserves log-concavity. This mission builds the convex-analysis spine of Boyd & Vandenberghe's Convex Optimization (Chapters 2–3) — separation and supporting hyperplanes, dual cones, the first- and second-order differential characterizations of convexity, Fenchel conjugacy — and climbs to Prékopa's theorem via the Prékopa–Leindler inequality, a landmark of Brunn–Minkowski theory absent from Mathlib.

29 thms5 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
AnalysisOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Minimization Methods for Non-Differentiable Functions I: The Subdifferential of a Nonnegative Combination of Convex FunctionsTextbook

Motivation

Many optimization problems in operations research have objectives that are convex but not differentiable: the maximum of finitely many linear or smooth functions, the value function of a Lagrangian dual, the cost of a two-stage linear program as a function of the first-stage decision. Gradient methods do not apply to these directly. N. Z. Shor's Minimization Methods for Non-Differentiable Functions (Springer Series in Computational Mathematics 3, 1985; translated by K. C. Kiwiel and A. Ruszczyński from the 1979 Russian edition) develops the algorithms that replace the gradient by a subgradient, and its first chapter sets up the calculus of subgradients these algorithms rely on.

This mission is the first of a series formalizing the book. It covers §1.2 (convex functions and the concept of subgradient) and §1.3 (rules for computing subgradients), printed pages 7–16. Every later mission in the series (the subgradient method, space dilation, the ellipsoid method, decomposition) assumes that a subgradient of the objective can be computed, and §1.3 is where the book explains how: by combining subgradients of simpler pieces.

Setting

Write EnE_nEn​ for nnn-dimensional Euclidean space with inner product (x,y)(x, y)(x,y) and norm ∥x∥\|x\|∥x∥. A function fff with domain a convex set M⊆EnM \subseteq E_nM⊆En​ is convex if its epigraph {(u,x):u≥f(x), x∈M}\{(u, x) : u \ge f(x),\ x \in M\}{(u,x):u≥f(x), x∈M} is convex, equivalently (1−α)f(x1)+αf(x2)≥f((1−α)x1+αx2)(1-\alpha) f(x_1) + \alpha f(x_2) \ge f((1-\alpha)x_1 + \alpha x_2)(1−α)f(x1​)+αf(x2​)≥f((1−α)x1​+αx2​) for x1,x2∈Mx_1, x_2 \in Mx1​,x2​∈M and α∈[0,1]\alpha \in [0,1]α∈[0,1].

Let x0x_0x0​ be an interior point of MMM. A vector ggg is a subgradient (or generalized gradient) of fff at x0x_0x0​ if

f(x)−f(x0)≥(g,x−x0)for all x∈M.(1.3)f(x) - f(x_0) \ge (g, x - x_0) \qquad \text{for all } x \in M. \tag{1.3}f(x)−f(x0​)≥(g,x−x0​)for all x∈M.(1.3)

The set of all subgradients is the subdifferential, written G(x0)G(x_0)G(x0​) or Gf(x0)G_f(x_0)Gf​(x0​). For fff differentiable at x0x_0x0​ it is the single gradient; for f(x)=∣x∣f(x) = |x|f(x)=∣x∣ on E1E_1E1​ it is [−1,1][-1, 1][−1,1] at x0=0x_0 = 0x0​=0.

The one-sided directional derivative of fff at x0x_0x0​ in direction η\etaη is

fη′(x0)=lim⁡t→0+f(x0+tη)−f(x0)t.f'_\eta(x_0) = \lim_{t \to 0+} \frac{f(x_0 + t\eta) - f(x_0)}{t}.fη′​(x0​)=t→0+lim​tf(x0​+tη)−f(x0​)​.

A direction η≠0\eta \ne 0η=0 is a direction of steepest descent at x0x_0x0​ if min⁡∥ξ∥=1fξ′(x0)=fη′(x0)/∥η∥\min_{\|\xi\| = 1} f'_\xi(x_0) = f'_\eta(x_0)/\|\eta\|min∥ξ∥=1​fξ′​(x0​)=fη′​(x0​)/∥η∥.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1.12 (p. 13), the subdifferential of a nonnegative combination

For convex f1,…,fkf_1, \dots, f_kf1​,…,fk​ on EnE_nEn​ and a1,…,ak≥0a_1, \dots, a_k \ge 0a1​,…,ak​≥0, the function f=∑i=1kaifif = \sum_{i=1}^k a_i f_if=∑i=1k​ai​fi​ is convex and, at every x0x_0x0​,

Gf(x0)={∑i=1kaigi  :  gi∈Gfi(x0), i=1,…,k}.G_f(x_0) = \Big\{ \sum_{i=1}^k a_i g_i \;:\; g_i \in G_{f_i}(x_0),\ i = 1, \dots, k \Big\}.Gf​(x0​)={i=1∑k​ai​gi​:gi​∈Gfi​​(x0​), i=1,…,k}.

Both inclusions are part of the goal.

Milestones

  1. Theorem 1.7 (p. 9): at an interior point x0x_0x0​ of the domain, G(x0)G(x_0)G(x0​) is nonempty, bounded, convex and closed.
  2. Theorem 1.8 (p. 9): at an interior point, fη′(x0)f'_\eta(x_0)fη′​(x0​) exists for every η\etaη and fη′(x0)=max⁡g∈G(x0)(g,η)f'_\eta(x_0) = \max_{g \in G(x_0)} (g, \eta)fη′​(x0​)=maxg∈G(x0​)​(g,η), with the maximum attained.
  3. Corollary (p. 12): an interior point x0x_0x0​ minimizes fff on MMM if and only if 0∈G(x0)0 \in G(x_0)0∈G(x0​).
  4. Theorem 1.11 (p. 12): if 0∉G(x0)0 \notin G(x_0)0∈/G(x0​) and g0g_0g0​ is the element of G(x0)G(x_0)G(x0​) nearest the origin, then −g0-g_0−g0​ is a direction of steepest descent.
  5. Theorem 1.9 (p. 11): fff is convex on EnE_nEn​ if and only if fη′(x)f'_\eta(x)fη′​(x) exists everywhere and t↦fη′(x+tη)t \mapsto f'_\eta(x + t\eta)t↦fη′​(x+tη) is nondecreasing for all x,ηx, \etax,η.
  6. Theorem 1.10 (p. 11): a twice continuously differentiable fff is convex if and only if its Hessian is positive semidefinite everywhere.
  7. Theorem 1.13 (p. 14): for convex f1,…,fmf_1, \dots, f_mf1​,…,fm​, the function φ=max⁡ifi\varphi = \max_i f_iφ=maxi​fi​ is convex and Gfi(x0)⊆Gφ(x0)G_{f_i}(x_0) \subseteq G_\varphi(x_0)Gfi​​(x0​)⊆Gφ​(x0​) for every index iii active at x0x_0x0​.

Significance

The result. Theorem 1.12 is the finite-dimensional, finite-valued case of the Moreau–Rockafellar sum rule. With Theorem 1.13 it is the book's recipe for computing subgradients of functions assembled from simple pieces by nonnegative combinations and pointwise maxima, the two operations that produce most nonsmooth convex objectives in practice (Lagrangian duals, penalty functions, piecewise-linear costs). Theorem 1.8 identifies the directional derivative with the support function of the subdifferential; the Corollary and Theorem 1.11 give the optimality condition and the steepest-descent direction that every descent method for nonsmooth convex functions starts from.

Formalizing it. These results are classical and have been proved many times in textbooks (Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, 1970, §23). Mathlib at the pinned revision has convexity, separation theorems and Carathéodory's theorem, but no subdifferential of a convex function on EnE_nEn​ and no max formula. The mission builds that layer: a subdifferential with the book's inequality (1.3), a one-sided directional derivative defined as a right-hand limit, and the calculus rules above. The platform has a Clarke-gradient analogue of Theorem 1.8 for locally Lipschitz functions and a Banach-space sum rule for f+12∥⋅∥2f + \tfrac12\|\cdot\|^2f+21​∥⋅∥2; neither states the convex, finite-dimensional results here.

Difficulty

The inclusion "⊇\supseteq⊇" in Theorem 1.12 is immediate from (1.3). The inclusion "⊆\subseteq⊆" is the content: a subgradient of the sum is a global object, and nothing in (1.3) splits it into subgradients of the pieces. Adding the inequalities of the pieces only produces vectors of the right form; it does not show every subgradient of fff arises this way. Any argument has to use the finite dimension and the interior-point setting, which is where Theorems 1.7 and 1.8 (existence of subgradients, compactness of G(x0)G(x_0)G(x0​), existence of one-sided derivatives) come in.

Theorem 1.8 in turn needs the existence of a finite right-hand limit of the difference quotient, which requires both monotonicity of the quotient and a lower bound, and the existence of a subgradient attaining the maximum, which is a separation statement. Theorem 1.9's "if" direction must rebuild convexity from one-sided derivative information alone, with no differentiability assumption.

Formalization scope

  • EnE_nEn​ is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) and (x,y)(x, y)(x,y) is inner ℝ x y. A function is f : EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) → ℝ; the domain MMM is a set, convexity on it is ConvexOn ℝ M f (which includes convexity of MMM), and interior points are x₀ ∈ interior M. Theorems 1.9, 1.10, 1.12 and 1.13 are stated on all of EnE_nEn​ (Set.univ), as the book proves them.
  • The subdifferential subdifferential M f x₀ is the set of ggg with f(x)−f(x0)≥(g,x−x0)f(x) - f(x_0) \ge (g, x - x_0)f(x)−f(x0​)≥(g,x−x0​) for all x∈Mx \in Mx∈M. It is defined for any x0x_0x0​; the interior-point assumption is a hypothesis of each theorem that needs it.
  • HasOneSidedDirDeriv f x₀ η d is the right-hand limit Tendsto … (𝓝[>] 0) (𝓝 d), not Mathlib's two-sided lineDeriv. Maxima and minima are stated with IsGreatest/IsLeast (attained), never with sSup/sInf.
  • Theorem 1.12 is an equality of sets over indices Fin k; k=0k = 0k=0 and zero coefficients are allowed, as in the book. Theorem 1.13's maximum is Finset.sup' over Fin m with m≥1m \ge 1m≥1, and it asserts only the inclusion the book states.
  • Theorem 1.11 is stated as the book's proof establishes it: the steepest-descent direction is minus the minimal-norm subgradient. The printed statement names the minimal-norm subgradient itself, along which the directional derivative is positive.
  • A formalization that states only "⊇\supseteq⊇" in Theorem 1.12, or only that each ∑aigi\sum a_i g_i∑ai​gi​ is a subgradient, is the easy half and does not count as the goal.
  • Theorems 1.1–1.6 (supporting hyperplane, separation, representation by extremal points, the convexity inequality, continuity on the interior) are Mathlib-level (geometric_hahn_banach_*, Carathéodory and Krein–Milman, ConvexOn.continuousOn_interior) and are not restated.

Contributions welcome: proofs of any milestone, a reusable lemma that the difference quotient of a convex function is monotone in ttt, and a general max formula; these are reusable in the later missions of the series, which define subgradients the same way.

Selected references

  • N. Z. Shor, Minimization Methods for Non-Differentiable Functions, Springer Series in Computational Mathematics 3, Springer, 1985, §§1.2–1.3, pp. 7–16. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-82118-9
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970, §23 (subgradients) and Theorem 23.8 (sum rule). https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400873173
  • J.-J. Moreau, "Fonctionnelles sous-différentiables", Comptes Rendus de l'Académie des Sciences 257 (1963), 4117–4119.
10 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Algorithmic Game TheoryLinear OptimizationOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Theory of Games and Economic Behavior III: Mixed Strategies, the Minimax Theorem and Good StrategiesTextbook

Motivation

A zero-sum two-person game in normalized form is a real matrix H(τ1,τ2)\mathcal H(\tau_1, \tau_2)H(τ1​,τ2​): player 1 chooses a row τ1\tau_1τ1​, player 2 simultaneously chooses a column τ2\tau_2τ2​, and player 2 pays player 1 the amount H(τ1,τ2)\mathcal H(\tau_1, \tau_2)H(τ1​,τ2​). Matrix games are the base case of non-cooperative game theory, the prototype of every minimax statement in optimization, statistics (Wald's decision theory) and online learning, and, through their equivalence with linear programming, a standard tool of operations research.

Chapter III of von Neumann and Morgenstern's Theory of Games and Economic Behavior (1944; third edition 1953) gives the book's complete solution of these games. Timeline:

  • 1928. J. von Neumann, "Zur Theorie der Gesellschaftsspiele", Math. Annalen 100, proves that every matrix game has a value in mixed strategies (the minimax theorem), by a topological argument. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01448847
  • 1937. von Neumann's growth-model paper gives a second proof via a fixed-point argument, later generalized by Kakutani (1941).
  • 1938. J. Ville gives the first elementary proof, based on convexity.
  • 1944. The Theory of Games presents Ville's route: a theorem of the alternative for matrices (§16) yields the minimax theorem (17:6), from which §17 derives the structure of the sets of good strategies.
  • 1951. Gale, Kuhn and Tucker, and Dantzig, relate matrix games to linear-programming duality.

Setting

Player 1 has β1≥1\beta_1 \ge 1β1​≥1 pure strategies τ1\tau_1τ1​, player 2 has β2≥1\beta_2 \ge 1β2​≥1 pure strategies τ2\tau_2τ2​, and H\mathcal HH is an arbitrary real β1×β2\beta_1 \times \beta_2β1​×β2​ matrix (14.1.1). A mixed strategy of player 1 is a probability vector ξ\xiξ in the simplex

Sβ1={ξ∈Rβ1:ξτ1≥0, ∑τ1ξτ1=1},S_{\beta_1} = \Big\{ \xi \in \mathbb R^{\beta_1} : \xi_{\tau_1} \ge 0,\ \sum_{\tau_1} \xi_{\tau_1} = 1 \Big\},Sβ1​​={ξ∈Rβ1​:ξτ1​​≥0, τ1​∑​ξτ1​​=1},

and similarly η∈Sβ2\eta \in S_{\beta_2}η∈Sβ2​​ for player 2. The pure strategy τ\tauτ is the coordinate vector δτ\delta^{\tau}δτ. The expected payoff is the bilinear form (17:2)

K(ξ,η)=∑τ1=1β1∑τ2=1β2H(τ1,τ2) ξτ1ητ2.K(\xi, \eta) = \sum_{\tau_1=1}^{\beta_1} \sum_{\tau_2=1}^{\beta_2} \mathcal H(\tau_1, \tau_2)\, \xi_{\tau_1} \eta_{\tau_2}.K(ξ,η)=τ1​=1∑β1​​τ2​=1∑β2​​H(τ1​,τ2​)ξτ1​​ητ2​​.

The good strategies of player 1 form the set Aˉ\bar AAˉ of those ξ∈Sβ1\xi \in S_{\beta_1}ξ∈Sβ1​​ at which Min⁡ηK(ξ,η)\operatorname{Min}_\eta K(\xi, \eta)Minη​K(ξ,η) assumes its maximum; those of player 2 form the set Bˉ\bar BBˉ of those η∈Sβ2\eta \in S_{\beta_2}η∈Sβ2​​ at which Max⁡ξK(ξ,η)\operatorname{Max}_\xi K(\xi, \eta)Maxξ​K(ξ,η) assumes its minimum ((17:B:a), (17:B:b)). A saddle point of KKK is a pair with K(ξ′,η)≤K(ξ,η)≤K(ξ,η′)K(\xi', \eta) \le K(\xi, \eta) \le K(\xi, \eta')K(ξ′,η)≤K(ξ,η)≤K(ξ,η′) for all ξ′,η′\xi', \eta'ξ′,η′. With pure strategies alone one has v1=Max⁡τ1Min⁡τ2Hv_1 = \operatorname{Max}_{\tau_1}\operatorname{Min}_{\tau_2}\mathcal Hv1​=Maxτ1​​Minτ2​​H and v2=Min⁡τ2Max⁡τ1Hv_2 = \operatorname{Min}_{\tau_2}\operatorname{Max}_{\tau_1}\mathcal Hv2​=Minτ2​​Maxτ1​​H; the game is specially strictly determined when v1=v2v_1 = v_2v1​=v2​.

For a general real function ϕ(x,y)\phi(x, y)ϕ(x,y) (§13) the same notions are Max⁡xMin⁡yϕ\operatorname{Max}_x \operatorname{Min}_y \phiMaxx​Miny​ϕ, Min⁡yMax⁡xϕ\operatorname{Min}_y \operatorname{Max}_x \phiMiny​Maxx​ϕ, saddle points, and the sets AϕA^\phiAϕ (maximizers of Min⁡yϕ\operatorname{Min}_y \phiMiny​ϕ) and BϕB^\phiBϕ (minimizers of Max⁡xϕ\operatorname{Max}_x \phiMaxx​ϕ), always under the book's standing hypothesis that these maxima and minima exist.

Formalization targets

Goal: (17:D), good strategies characterized by their supports

For all ξ∈Sβ1\xi \in S_{\beta_1}ξ∈Sβ1​​ and η∈Sβ2\eta \in S_{\beta_2}η∈Sβ2​​: ξ∈Aˉ\xi \in \bar Aξ∈Aˉ and η∈Bˉ\eta \in \bar Bη∈Bˉ if and only if

ξτ1=0 whenever ∑τ2H(τ1,τ2)ητ2<max⁡τ1′∑τ2H(τ1′,τ2)ητ2,\xi_{\tau_1} = 0 \text{ whenever } \sum_{\tau_2} \mathcal H(\tau_1, \tau_2)\eta_{\tau_2} < \max_{\tau_1'} \sum_{\tau_2} \mathcal H(\tau_1', \tau_2)\eta_{\tau_2},ξτ1​​=0 whenever τ2​∑​H(τ1​,τ2​)ητ2​​<τ1′​max​τ2​∑​H(τ1′​,τ2​)ητ2​​, ητ2=0 whenever ∑τ1H(τ1,τ2)ξτ1>min⁡τ2′∑τ1H(τ1,τ2′)ξτ1.\eta_{\tau_2} = 0 \text{ whenever } \sum_{\tau_1} \mathcal H(\tau_1, \tau_2)\xi_{\tau_1} > \min_{\tau_2'} \sum_{\tau_1} \mathcal H(\tau_1, \tau_2')\xi_{\tau_1}.ητ2​​=0 whenever τ1​∑​H(τ1​,τ2​)ξτ1​​>τ2′​min​τ1​∑​H(τ1​,τ2′​)ξτ1​​.

The statement fixes no value and no constant; it says which pairs of mixed strategies are optimal.

Milestones, in attack order

  1. (13:A*) Max⁡xMin⁡yϕ≤Min⁡yMax⁡xϕ\operatorname{Max}_x \operatorname{Min}_y \phi \le \operatorname{Min}_y \operatorname{Max}_x \phiMaxx​Miny​ϕ≤Miny​Maxx​ϕ.
  2. (13:D*) If Max⁡Min⁡=Min⁡Max⁡\operatorname{Max}\operatorname{Min} = \operatorname{Min}\operatorname{Max}MaxMin=MinMax, the saddle points of ϕ\phiϕ are exactly Aϕ×BϕA^\phi \times B^\phiAϕ×Bϕ.
  3. (17:A) Min⁡ηK(ξ,η)=Min⁡τ2∑τ1H(τ1,τ2)ξτ1\operatorname{Min}_\eta K(\xi, \eta) = \operatorname{Min}_{\tau_2} \sum_{\tau_1} \mathcal H(\tau_1, \tau_2)\xi_{\tau_1}Minη​K(ξ,η)=Minτ2​​∑τ1​​H(τ1​,τ2​)ξτ1​​, and dually for Max⁡ξ\operatorname{Max}_\xiMaxξ​.
  4. (16:C) For every matrix a(i,j)a(i, j)a(i,j) exactly one of: some x∈Smx \in S_mx∈Sm​ with ∑ja(i,j)xj≤0\sum_j a(i,j)x_j \le 0∑j​a(i,j)xj​≤0 for all iii; some w∈Snw \in S_nw∈Sn​ with ∑ia(i,j)wi>0\sum_i a(i,j)w_i > 0∑i​a(i,j)wi​>0 for all jjj.
  5. (16:F) The weak form with ≥0\ge 0≥0 in place of >0> 0>0.
  6. (17:6) The minimax theorem: a saddle point of KKK exists (already on the platform as AGT.zero_sum_minimax, proved).
  7. (17:C:f) ξ∈Aˉ\xi \in \bar Aξ∈Aˉ and η∈Bˉ\eta \in \bar Bη∈Bˉ iff ξ,η\xi, \etaξ,η is a saddle point of KKK.

After the goal: (17:E) the game is specially strictly determined iff each player has a pure good strategy.

Significance

(17:D) is the complementary-slackness description of the optimal strategy pairs of a matrix game: a good strategy puts weight only on pure strategies that are best replies to the opponent's good strategy, and conversely any pair of mutually supported best replies is optimal. It is the basis of support-enumeration methods for matrix games, of the equalizing arguments used to solve small games by hand (the book's Chapter IV applies it to Matching Pennies, Stone–Paper–Scissors and Poker), and of the rectangular structure Aˉ×Bˉ\bar A \times \bar BAˉ×Bˉ of the set of optimal pairs. (17:E) connects the mixed-strategy solution to the pure-strategy theory of §14 and to the perfect-information games of §15.

The results are classical and proved in the book. The minimax theorem itself is already machine-checked on the platform (AGT.zero_sum_minimax), and Mathlib contains Sion's minimax theorem and the basic saddle-point lemmas for extended-real functions on sets. This mission adds the book's own chain: the §13 saddle-point calculus under its standing attainment hypothesis, the theorems of the alternative (16:C) and (16:F) in the simplex-normalized form the book uses, the reduction (17:A) to pure strategies, and the characterizations (17:C:f), (17:D), (17:E) of good strategies, which are not on the platform in any form.

Difficulty

The "if" direction of (17:D) cannot be proved from the support conditions alone by local reasoning: that a pair of mutual best replies consists of good strategies uses that the value Max⁡ξMin⁡ηK\operatorname{Max}_\xi \operatorname{Min}_\eta KMaxξ​Minη​K equals Min⁡ηMax⁡ξK\operatorname{Min}_\eta \operatorname{Max}_\xi KMinη​Maxξ​K, i.e. the minimax theorem. Without that equality the "if" direction of (13:D*) fails (points of Aϕ×BϕA^\phi \times B^\phiAϕ×Bϕ exist but are not saddle points), so the calculus of §13 alone does not suffice. Likewise (16:C) is not a direct instance of the Farkas lemma forms on the platform: its alternatives are normalized to the simplex and the second one is strict, and both the existence and the mutual exclusion must be shown.

Formalization scope

Lean conventions, fixed throughout:

  • Pure strategies are Fin β₁, Fin β₂ (numbered from 000), the matrix is H : Fin β₁ → Fin β₂ → ℝ, and SβS_\betaSβ​ is Mathlib's stdSimplex ℝ (Fin β).
  • Nonempty strategy sets (β≥1\beta \ge 1β≥1, from "τ = 1, …, β" in 14.1.1): every theorem assumes 0 < β₁, 0 < β₂, or mixed strategies ξ∈Sβ1\xi \in S_{\beta_1}ξ∈Sβ1​​, η∈Sβ2\eta \in S_{\beta_2}η∈Sβ2​​, which force it. The theorems of the alternative assume n,m≥1n, m \ge 1n,m≥1 (a matrix with rows and columns).
  • Standing hypothesis of 13.2.1 ("we are restricting our considerations to such functions, for which Max and Min exist"): the §13 results (13:A*), (13:D*) are stated for an arbitrary ϕ:X×Y→R\phi : X \times Y \to \mathbb Rϕ:X×Y→R under the predicate MaxMinAttained φ, which says that Min⁡yϕ(x,y)\operatorname{Min}_y \phi(x, y)Miny​ϕ(x,y), Max⁡xϕ(x,y)\operatorname{Max}_x \phi(x, y)Maxx​ϕ(x,y), Max⁡xMin⁡yϕ\operatorname{Max}_x \operatorname{Min}_y \phiMaxx​Miny​ϕ and Min⁡yMax⁡xϕ\operatorname{Min}_y \operatorname{Max}_x \phiMiny​Maxx​ϕ are attained. (13:D*) also carries the hypothesis of 13.5.2 that saddle points exist, stated as Max⁡xMin⁡yϕ=Min⁡yMax⁡xϕ\operatorname{Max}_x \operatorname{Min}_y \phi = \operatorname{Min}_y \operatorname{Max}_x \phiMaxx​Miny​ϕ=Miny​Maxx​ϕ.
  • Max⁡\operatorname{Max}Max and Min⁡\operatorname{Min}Min are the real ⨆, ⨅; they are the book's attained values under the hypotheses above (compactness of the simplex and continuity of KKK for the mixed game). (17:A) asserts attainment explicitly (IsLeast, IsGreatest). "Does not assume its maximum at τ1\tau_1τ1​" in the goal is written without any Max operator.
  • Aˉ\bar AAˉ, Bˉ\bar BBˉ are defined as maximizers and minimizers directly from KKK, not through an assumed value v′v'v′.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: Aˉ\bar AAˉ and Bˉ\bar BBˉ are not taken as hypotheses or defined through the support conditions, strategy sets cannot be empty, and no Max over an empty or unbounded set occurs.

Contributions welcome: proofs of the milestones, especially (16:C) (from Mathlib's convex separation or from a platform Farkas lemma) and the bridge from AGT.zero_sum_minimax to (17:C:f). The §13 lemmas and the (17:A) reduction are reusable by any mission about matrix games or bilinear saddle points.

Selected references

  • J. von Neumann and O. Morgenstern, Theory of Games and Economic Behavior, 60th-anniversary edition, Princeton University Press, 2007 (reprint of the 3rd edition, 1953), §§13, 16, 17. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400829460
  • J. von Neumann, "Zur Theorie der Gesellschaftsspiele", Mathematische Annalen 100 (1928), 295–320. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01448847
  • J. Ville, "Sur la théorie générale des jeux où intervient l'habileté des joueurs", in É. Borel, Traité du calcul des probabilités et de ses applications, IV.2, Gauthier-Villars, 1938, 105–113.
  • S. Kakutani, "A generalization of Brouwer's fixed point theorem", Duke Mathematical Journal 8 (1941), 457–459. https://doi.org/10.1215/S0012-7094-41-00838-4
  • D. Gale, H. W. Kuhn and A. W. Tucker, "Linear programming and the theory of games", in Activity Analysis of Production and Allocation, Wiley, 1951, 317–329.
11 thms4 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimizationProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Numerical Techniques for Stochastic Optimization II: Logarithmic Concavity of Probabilistic ConstraintsTextbook

Motivation

Many engineering and economic planning problems must meet random requirements with a prescribed reliability: a reservoir must satisfy demand with probability at least 0.950.950.95, a power system must cover load except on rare days, an inventory must avoid shortage with high probability. Probabilistic constrained programming (also called chance-constrained programming) models this by requiring that a system of random inequalities hold jointly with probability at least ppp.

The first obstacle to solving such problems is structural. The probability that random constraints are satisfied is, in general, neither concave nor convex in the decision, so the feasible set need not be convex and local search can stall. Prékopa's theory of logarithmically concave measures (1971–1973) removed that obstacle for a large class of distributions, and it is the basis of the numerical methods of Chapter 5 of Ermoliev and Wets, Numerical Techniques for Stochastic Optimization (Springer 1988). This mission formalizes the structural theorems of that chapter.

Timeline:

  • 1959: Charnes and Cooper, individual chance constraints.
  • 1971: Prékopa, logarithmic concave measures with application to stochastic programming (Acta Sci. Math. Szeged 32).
  • 1973: Prékopa, logarithmic concave measures and functions (Acta Sci. Math. Szeged 34), containing the marginal theorem: marginals of log-concave functions are log-concave.
  • 1970s–1980s: nonlinear programming methods for (5.1) (SUMT with logarithmic penalty, supporting hyperplanes, reduced gradients) combined with Monte Carlo evaluation of h0h_0h0​; the chapter surveys them.

Setting

Let ξ\xiξ be a random vector in Rq\mathbb R^qRq on a probability space (Ω,F,P)(\Omega, \mathcal F, P)(Ω,F,P) and let g1,…,gr:Rn×Rq→Rg_1, \dots, g_r : \mathbb R^n \times \mathbb R^q \to \mathbb Rg1​,…,gr​:Rn×Rq→R. The chapter studies problem (5.1):

min⁡h(x)s.t.h0(x)=P(g1(x,ξ)≥0,…,gr(x,ξ)≥0)≥p,h1(x)≥p1,…,hm(x)≥pm.\min h(x) \quad \text{s.t.} \quad h_0(x) = P\bigl(g_1(x,\xi) \ge 0, \dots, g_r(x,\xi) \ge 0\bigr) \ge p, \quad h_1(x) \ge p_1, \dots, h_m(x) \ge p_m .minh(x)s.t.h0​(x)=P(g1​(x,ξ)≥0,…,gr​(x,ξ)≥0)≥p,h1​(x)≥p1​,…,hm​(x)≥pm​.

The function h0h_0h0​ is the probability function (chanceProb in Lean). In the special case gi(x,y)=Tix−yig_i(x,y) = T_i x - y_igi​(x,y)=Ti​x−yi​ it equals F(Tx)F(Tx)F(Tx), where FFF is the joint distribution function of ξ\xiξ.

A function f≥0f \ge 0f≥0 is logarithmically concave on a convex set SSS if

f(λu+(1−λ)v)≥f(u)λf(v)1−λ,u,v∈S, 0<λ<1.f(\lambda u + (1-\lambda) v) \ge f(u)^{\lambda} f(v)^{1-\lambda}, \qquad u, v \in S,\ 0 < \lambda < 1 .f(λu+(1−λ)v)≥f(u)λf(v)1−λ,u,v∈S, 0<λ<1.

Where f>0f > 0f>0 this is concavity of log⁡f\log flogf; the power form also makes sense where f=0f = 0f=0. Nondegenerate normal densities, uniform densities on convex bodies and exponential densities are log-concave.

Section 5.7 introduces the polynomial distribution (5.19) on the cube 0<zj≤10 < z_j \le 10<zj​≤1:

F(z1,…,zn)=1∑i=1Nciz1αi1⋯znαin,ci>0, αij≤0, ∑jαij<0F(z_1, \dots, z_n) = \frac{1}{\sum_{i=1}^{N} c_i z_1^{\alpha_{i1}} \cdots z_n^{\alpha_{in}}}, \qquad c_i > 0,\ \alpha_{ij} \le 0,\ \textstyle\sum_j \alpha_{ij} < 0F(z1​,…,zn​)=∑i=1N​ci​z1αi1​​⋯znαin​​1​,ci​>0, αij​≤0, ∑j​αij​<0

(polyDistF in Lean).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5.1

If g1,…,grg_1, \dots, g_rg1​,…,gr​ are jointly concave on Rn+q\mathbb R^{n+q}Rn+q and ξ\xiξ has a log-concave density fff on Rq\mathbb R^qRq, then

h0 is logarithmically concave on Rn.h_0 \text{ is logarithmically concave on } \mathbb R^n .h0​ is logarithmically concave on Rn.

Its immediate consequence is that the feasible set {x:h0(x)≥p}\{x : h_0(x) \ge p\}{x:h0​(x)≥p} is convex for every ppp.

Milestones

  1. Theorem 5.2.1: if hhh is log-concave on the convex set H={h≥p}H = \{h \ge p\}H={h≥p}, 0<p<10 < p < 10<p<1, then h−ph - ph−p is log-concave on HHH. This makes the logarithmic penalty function (5.5) of the SUMT method convex.
  2. Theorem 5.2.2: under the standing assumptions of §5.2, every interior point zzz of the feasible set of (5.1) satisfies hi(z)>pih_i(z) > p_ihi​(z)>pi​, i=0,…,mi = 0, \dots, mi=0,…,m.
  3. Theorem 5.7.1 (proved content, (5.21)): for n=2n = 2n=2 and oppositely ordered exponents, ∂2F/∂z1∂z2≥0\partial^2 F / \partial z_1 \partial z_2 \ge 0∂2F/∂z1​∂z2​≥0 on (0,1)2(0,1)^2(0,1)2.
  4. Theorem 5.7.2: the polynomial distribution function is log-concave on (0,1]n(0,1]^n(0,1]n.

The platform theorem ConvexOptimization.prekopa_marginal_log_concave (Prékopa's marginal theorem, proved) is included as a reference item.

Significance

Theorem 5.1 turns a probabilistic constraint into a convex constraint after taking logarithms. This is what makes convergence proofs for nonlinear programming methods (SUMT with logarithmic penalty, supporting hyperplanes, reduced gradients) applicable to (5.1) and to the reliability maximization problem (5.4); without it, those methods have no guarantee of finding a global optimum. Theorems 5.2.1 and 5.2.2 are the two facts that make the SUMT method of §5.2 well defined and convex on the interior of the feasible set. Theorem 5.7.2 shows that probabilistic constraints under the polynomial distribution define convex sets, so they can be added to geometric programmes.

On status: Theorem 5.1 is a classical result, proved in Prékopa's papers (the chapter itself refers to Prékopa's survey for the proof). Prékopa's marginal theorem and the Prékopa–Leindler inequality are already machine-checked on this platform; Theorem 5.1 and the §5.2 and §5.7 theorems are, as far as a search of the platform shows, not formalized. The work is formalizing known proofs, in the log-concavity predicate the platform already uses.

Difficulty

The obvious argument for Theorem 5.1, "the constraint set is convex and the density is log-concave, so the probability is log-concave", hides the real content: log-concavity of a probability as a function of a parameter is a statement about integrals, and it does not follow from pointwise properties of the integrand without a Prékopa–Leindler-type inequality. Concavity of each gig_igi​ separately in xxx and in yyy is not enough; joint concavity in (x,y)(x, y)(x,y) is used essentially. The probability function vanishes on large regions in typical examples, so any argument that takes logarithms pointwise fails at the boundary of its support.

For Theorem 5.2.2 the naive argument fails at the index i=0i = 0i=0: nothing about h0h_0h0​ is assumed directly, and log-concavity of h0h_0h0​ is exactly Theorem 5.1. For Theorem 5.7.1 the difficulty is a sign condition on a covariance; without the ordering hypothesis the mixed derivative can be negative.

Formalization scope

Rn\mathbb R^nRn and Rq\mathbb R^qRq are EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) and EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin q); the constraint functions take pairs (x,y)(x, y)(x,y) in the product, and concavity is ConcaveOn ℝ Set.univ on that product (joint concavity). A "continuous probability distribution with density fff" is stated as P.map ξ = volume.withDensity (ENNReal.ofReal ∘ f) with ξ\xiξ and fff measurable and PPP a probability measure. Log-concavity is the platform definition ConvexOptimization.LogConcaveOn (nonnegativity plus the power inequality), imported as a reference item; concavity of Real.log ∘ h₀ would be a different, wrong property because Lean's Real.log 0 = 0. Indices are 0-based (Fin r, Fin m, Fin N, Fin n); the probabilistic constraint i=0i = 0i=0 of Theorem 5.2.2 is stated separately from h1,…,hmh_1, \dots, h_mh1​,…,hm​. The polynomial distribution is a formula on Fin n → ℝ with real powers, used only on the cube.

No constant of the book is replaced by an explicit value: every result of this chapter is qualitative.

Corrections of the printed text, recorded in each item's Formalization Note:

  • Theorem 5.1 states the density condition "for every x1,x2∈Rnx_1, x_2 \in \mathbb R^nx1​,x2​∈Rn"; the density lives on Rq\mathbb R^qRq and the condition is imposed there.
  • (5.19) prints the first factor as ziαi1z_i^{\alpha_{i1}}ziαi1​​ and the domain index as i=1,…,Ni = 1, \dots, Ni=1,…,N; they are read as z1αi1z_1^{\alpha_{i1}}z1αi1​​ and j=1,…,nj = 1, \dots, nj=1,…,n.
  • Theorem 5.7.1 prints its ordering hypothesis with transposed indices (α11≤α12≤⋯≤α1n\alpha_{11} \le \alpha_{12} \le \dots \le \alpha_{1n}α11​≤α12​≤⋯≤α1n​); following the proof, it is read as: across the NNN terms the z1z_1z1​-exponents increase and the z2z_2z2​-exponents decrease.
  • Theorem 5.7.1 claims "is a probability distribution function"; the book proves only (5.21), and normalization would need ∑ici=1\sum_i c_i = 1∑i​ci​=1, which is not assumed. The formal statement is (5.21), the mixed derivative as an iterated deriv.

Theorem 5.2.2 carries all six assumptions of §5.2, including compactness of the feasible set and the Slater point; it does not assume log-concavity of h0h_0h0​, which must be derived from the density and concavity hypotheses. A trivializing formalization, such as one with a density hypothesis that no probability law satisfies or a log-concavity predicate that holds for every function vanishing somewhere, is ruled out: the density hypotheses are satisfiable (checked locally) and LogConcaveOn is the multiplicative inequality at every pair of points.

Needed infrastructure: Prékopa's marginal theorem (available), log-concavity of indicators of convex sets and of products, measurability of the constraint set, and Artin's theorem that a sum of log-convex functions is log-convex (for Theorem 5.7.2). Artin's theorem and closure properties of LogConcaveOn are reusable beyond this mission, and contributions of them are welcome.

Selected references

  • A. Prékopa, "Numerical Solution of Probabilistic Constrained Programming Problems", in Yu. Ermoliev and R. J-B Wets (eds.), Numerical Techniques for Stochastic Optimization, Springer Series in Computational Mathematics 10, Springer 1988, Ch. 5, pp. 123–139. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-61370-8
  • A. Prékopa, "Logarithmic concave measures with application to stochastic programming", Acta Sci. Math. (Szeged) 32 (1971), 301–316.
  • A. Prékopa, "On logarithmic concave measures and functions", Acta Sci. Math. (Szeged) 34 (1973), 335–343.
  • A. Charnes and W. W. Cooper, "Chance-constrained programming", Management Science 6 (1959), 73–79. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.6.1.73
  • B. L. Miller and H. M. Wagner, "Chance constrained programming with joint constraints", Operations Research 13 (1965), 930–945. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.13.6.930
  • A. Prékopa, Stochastic Programming, Kluwer 1995. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-94-017-3087-7
9 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Linear OptimizationOperations ResearchOptimization+1·Captain: mikedeng1

Numerical Techniques for Stochastic Optimization I: Edmundson–Madansky Bounds for Independent Random Data and Simple RecourseTextbook

Motivation

In a two-stage stochastic linear program a decision xxx is taken before random data ξ\xiξ are observed, and a corrective recourse decision yyy is taken afterwards at a cost. The objective contains the expectation of an optimal value of a linear program, ∫Q(x,ξ(ω)) P(dω)\int Q(x,\xi(\omega))\,P(d\omega)∫Q(x,ξ(ω))P(dω), and for continuous or high-dimensional ξ\xiξ that integral cannot be evaluated exactly. Practical methods therefore replace ξ\xiξ by a discrete random vector and control the error by computable lower and upper bounds on the expected recourse cost. Chapter 2 of Ermoliev and Wets (eds.), Numerical Techniques for Stochastic Optimization (Springer 1988), by P. Kall, A. Ruszczyński and K. Frauendorfer, surveys these bounds as they were used in the codes of the time: Jensen's inequality from below, the Edmundson–Madansky inequality from above, and the special structure of simple recourse, where the expected cost is available in closed form.

Timeline. Jensen's inequality (1906) gives the lower bound for a convex integrand. A. Madansky, "Bounds on the expectation of a convex function of a multivariate random variable", Ann. Math. Statist. 30 (1959), and H. P. Edmundson (RAND report, 1956) gave the upper bound by the two-point law on the endpoints of an interval, and its product version for independent components. Kall and Stoyan (1982), Huang, Ziemba and Ben-Tal (1977), Frauendorfer and Kall (1988) developed partition refinement of both bounds, the scheme this chapter describes; Frauendorfer (1988) extended the upper bound to dependent data on boxes.

Setting

The two-stage problem (2.11) is: minimize ψ(x)=cTx+∫ΩQ(x,ξ(ω)) P(dω)\psi(x)=c^Tx+\int_\Omega Q(x,\xi(\omega))\,P(d\omega)ψ(x)=cTx+∫Ω​Q(x,ξ(ω))P(dω) subject to Ax=bAx=bAx=b, x≥0x\ge 0x≥0. The recourse cost Q(x,ξ)Q(x,\xi)Q(x,ξ) is the optimal value of the second-stage problem (2.12),

Q(x,ξ)=min⁡{qTy:Wy=h−Tx, y≥0},ξ=(q,h,T),Q(x,\xi)=\min\{q^Ty : Wy=h-Tx,\ y\ge 0\},\qquad \xi=(q,h,T),Q(x,ξ)=min{qTy:Wy=h−Tx, y≥0},ξ=(q,h,T),

with a deterministic m2×n2m_2\times n_2m2​×n2​ matrix WWW (fixed recourse), and Q=+∞Q=+\inftyQ=+∞ when (2.12) is infeasible. Throughout the chapter the book assumes complete recourse, {Wy:y≥0}=Rm2\{Wy:y\ge0\}=\mathbb R^{m_2}{Wy:y≥0}=Rm2​, and dual feasibility: for every realization of qqq some uuu satisfies WTu≤qW^Tu\le qWTu≤q. Under these assumptions QQQ is finite. The expected recourse function is Q(x)=∫Q(x,ξ(ω)) P(dω)\mathcal Q(x)=\int Q(x,\xi(\omega))\,P(d\omega)Q(x)=∫Q(x,ξ(ω))P(dω).

The Edmundson–Madansky law of an interval [a,b][a,b][a,b], a<ba<ba<b, with mean ξ0\xi^0ξ0 puts mass p1=(b−ξ0)/(b−a)p_1=(b-\xi^0)/(b-a)p1​=(b−ξ0)/(b−a) at aaa and p2=(ξ0−a)/(b−a)p_2=(\xi^0-a)/(b-a)p2​=(ξ0−a)/(b−a) at bbb (2.32). For a box Ξ=×j=1m[aj,bj]\Xi=\times_{j=1}^m[a_j,b_j]Ξ=×j=1m​[aj​,bj​] and means ξj0\xi^0_jξj0​, the vector ξ^\hat\xiξ^​ with independent components of these two-point laws sits at the vertex vvv with probability ∏jpj(vj)\prod_j p_j(v_j)∏j​pj​(vj​).

Simple recourse is the case W=[I,−I]W=[I,-I]W=[I,−I], q=[q+,q−]q=[q^+,q^-]q=[q+,q−] with qj++qj−≥0q^+_j+q^-_j\ge0qj+​+qj−​≥0, deterministic TTT and random hhh only. With χ=Tx\chi=Txχ=Tx the recourse cost splits into one-row costs Qj(χj,hj)=qj+(hj−χj)Q_j(\chi_j,h_j)=q^+_j(h_j-\chi_j)Qj​(χj​,hj​)=qj+​(hj​−χj​) if hj≥χjh_j\ge\chi_jhj​≥χj​, and qj−(χj−hj)q^-_j(\chi_j-h_j)qj−​(χj​−hj​) otherwise.

Formalization targets

Goal: the Edmundson–Madansky bound for independent components (p. 46)

If ξ\xiξ has independent components ξj∈[aj,bj]\xi_j\in[a_j,b_j]ξj​∈[aj​,bj​] with means ξj0\xi^0_jξj0​, and φ\varphiφ is convex on Ξ=×j[aj,bj]\Xi=\times_j[a_j,b_j]Ξ=×j​[aj​,bj​], then

Eφ(ξ)≤∑v∈vert Ξ(∏j=1mpj(vj))φ(v).E\varphi(\xi)\le\sum_{v\in\mathrm{vert}\,\Xi}\Big(\prod_{j=1}^m p_j(v_j)\Big)\varphi(v).Eφ(ξ)≤v∈vertΞ∑​(j=1∏m​pj​(vj​))φ(v).

The book applies it to φ=Q(x,⋅)\varphi=Q(x,\cdot)φ=Q(x,⋅); the goal is stated for every convex φ\varphiφ, with the explicit weights of (2.32).

Milestones

  1. Properties (b), (d), (e) of p. 40: Q(x,⋅)Q(x,\cdot)Q(x,⋅) is piecewise linear and convex in (h,T)(h,T)(h,T); Q(⋅,ξ)Q(\cdot,\xi)Q(⋅,ξ) is convex piecewise linear in xxx; the expected recourse function is finite and convex under finite second moments.
  2. The Jensen lower bound (2.26)–(2.27) on a partition (a published, proved theorem, reused).
  3. The dual-multiplier lower bound (2.30)–(2.31).
  4. The one-dimensional Edmundson–Madansky inequality (2.32)–(2.34).
  5. For simple recourse: separability (2.46)–(2.49), the closed form (2.51) of EQjEQ_jEQj​, and the bounds (2.55)–(2.56) from the one-block problem.

Significance

The upper bound is the half of the bounding scheme that is not automatic. Jensen's inequality needs only a mean; an upper bound on the expectation of a convex function needs a bounded support and, in the product form, independence. Together they give a certified interval for the optimal value of a two-stage problem, and repeated partitioning of the support shrinks that interval; this is the basis of the sequential approximation methods of §2.2.4 and of later codes. The dual-multiplier bound and the simple-recourse formulas are the pieces that make those intervals cheap to compute.

The results are classical and proved in the literature cited on the page. The one-dimensional Edmundson–Madansky inequality and the general extreme-point form of the upper bound (a measure on the extreme points reproducing the barycentre) are already formalized on Prove2Me in the Introduction to Stochastic Programming series, as is the partition Jensen bound. The product form for independent components is not: deriving it from the extreme-point form requires constructing the product kernel, which is the content of this mission. The recourse properties (b), (d), (e) for a general distribution with finite second moments, the dual-multiplier bound and the simple-recourse formulas are not formalized anywhere known to this mission.

Difficulty

The obvious argument inducts on the dimension, applying the one-dimensional inequality in one coordinate while the others are held fixed. That step needs the conditional law of the remaining coordinates given the first to be their unconditional law, i.e. independence expressed as a product decomposition of the joint law, and it needs φ\varphiφ with one coordinate replaced by an endpoint to remain convex on the lower-dimensional box and integrable. For dependent components the inequality is false with these weights: on [0,1]2[0,1]^2[0,1]2 with means (12,12)(\tfrac12,\tfrac12)(21​,21​) and φ(x,y)=(x−y)2\varphi(x,y)=(x-y)^2φ(x,y)=(x−y)2, the product law gives 12\tfrac1221​ while mass 12\tfrac1221​ at (1,0)(1,0)(1,0) and at (0,1)(0,1)(0,1) gives 111. The book's remark that the product law is extremal among all laws on Ξ\XiΞ with the given mean fails for this reason when m≥2m\ge2m≥2, and is not part of this mission.

For the recourse properties the difficulty is bookkeeping: QQQ is an extended-real optimal value, and finiteness, measurability in ω\omegaω and integrability must be derived from complete recourse, dual feasibility and the moment hypothesis rather than assumed.

Formalization scope

Vectors are functions from finite index types to R\mathbb RR (ι → ℝ), matrices are Mathlib Matrix, and random data live on a probability space (Ω, P). The recourse cost is an EReal infimum over the feasible set, so infeasibility gives +∞+\infty+∞ and unboundedness −∞-\infty−∞ exactly as on p. 39; theorems that integrate it carry complete recourse and dual feasibility, which make it finite. The expected recourse function integrates the real part of the recourse cost. Independence of the components is ProbabilityTheory.iIndepFun; the box is Set.pi univ (fun j => Icc (a j) (b j)), with aj<bja_j<b_jaj​<bj​, and values in the box are required almost surely. The upper bound is the explicit sum over Boolean vertex labels of products of the weights (2.32); no abstract extremal measure is used.

Conventions fixed where the page is silent or ambiguous:

  • Properties (b), (d), (e) are stated on all of Rn1\mathbb R^{n_1}Rn1​: under the standing complete-recourse assumption K2=Rn1K_2=\mathbb R^{n_1}K2​=Rn1​. "Convex piecewise linear" is rendered as a maximum of finitely many affine functions.
  • The book's hypothesis of finite second moments in (e) is kept as stated, componentwise.
  • The book writes QQQ for both Q(x,ξ)Q(x,\xi)Q(x,ξ) and Q(x)\mathcal Q(x)Q(x), and reuses Q~\tilde QQ~​, ψ~\tilde\psiψ~​ for different functions in (2.27) and (2.30)–(2.31); the Lean names are recourseCost, expectedRecourse and dualLowerBound.
  • In (2.51) a conditional mean on a null event is 000 in Lean; it always appears multiplied by that event's probability, so the formula is unchanged.
  • In (2.56) the minimum is a real infimum over the nonempty first-stage feasible set; attainment is not claimed.
  • No constant of the chapter is hidden behind O(⋅)O(\cdot)O(⋅); all bounds are explicit.

A goal stated for affine φ\varphiφ (where it is an equality), or with ξ^\hat\xiξ^​ allowed to be any discrete law with the right mean, would be trivial or a different theorem; the weights are the products of (2.32), and independence of the components is a hypothesis.

A complete development needs: finite-dimensional LP duality with extended-real values (reusable across all recourse missions), measurability and integrability of optimal-value functions, the conditional-independence step for product measures, and the one-dimensional chord inequality. The partitioned upper bound (2.37) and the discrete reformulation (2.21), (2.28) are natural follow-up statements on the same definitions.

Selected references

  • P. Kall, A. Ruszczyński, K. Frauendorfer, "Approximation Techniques in Stochastic Programming", in Yu. Ermoliev and R. J-B Wets (eds.), Numerical Techniques for Stochastic Optimization, Springer Series in Computational Mathematics 10, Springer 1988, Ch. 2, pp. 33–64. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-61370-8
  • A. Madansky, "Bounds on the expectation of a convex function of a multivariate random variable", Annals of Mathematical Statistics 30 (1959), 743–746. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177706203
  • P. Kall, Stochastic Linear Programming, Springer 1976. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-66252-2
  • R. J-B Wets, "Stochastic programs with fixed recourse: the equivalent deterministic program", SIAM Review 16 (1974), 309–339. https://doi.org/10.1137/1016053
  • K. Frauendorfer, "Solving SLP recourse problems with arbitrary multivariate distributions — the dependent case", Mathematics of Operations Research 13 (1988), 377–394. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.13.3.377
  • J. R. Birge, F. Louveaux, Introduction to Stochastic Programming, Springer 1997, Ch. 8. https://doi.org/10.1007/b97617
13 thms4 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimizationProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Introduction to the Scenario Approach I: The Violation Distribution of the Scenario SolutionTextbook

Motivation

Many design problems in control, finance and operations research are convex programs with uncertain constraints: a decision θ\thetaθ must satisfy θ∈Θδ\theta\in\Theta_\deltaθ∈Θδ​ for a parameter δ\deltaδ that is not known in advance. Enforcing the constraint for every possible δ\deltaδ (robust optimization) is often intractable or too conservative, and a chance-constrained formulation needs the distribution of δ\deltaδ, which in practice is rarely known. The scenario approach replaces the uncertain constraint by the constraints of NNN observed samples δ1,…,δN\delta_1,\dots,\delta_Nδ1​,…,δN​ and solves the resulting ordinary convex program. The question it answers is how much of the unseen uncertainty the resulting decision still violates.

The answer, the generalization theorem of the scenario approach, is distribution-free: the probability that the scenario solution violates more than a fraction ε\varepsilonε of the uncertainty is bounded by a binomial tail that depends only on NNN and on the number ddd of decision variables. This mission formalizes that theorem as it is presented in Chapters 3 and 5 of Campi and Garatti's textbook Introduction to the Scenario Approach (SIAM/MOS 2018), the first mission of a series on the book.

Timeline. Calafiore and Campi introduced scenario programs and bounded the violation of their solutions through the count of support constraints (Math. Program. 2005; IEEE TAC 2006). Campi and Garatti proved in 2008 that the binomial-tail bound of Theorem 3.7 holds for every convex scenario program under existence and uniqueness of the solution, and that it is attained with equality by fully supported problems (SIAM J. Optim. 2008), which settled the tightness question. The textbook (DOI 10.1137/1.9781611975444) presents the theorem with a complete proof for fully supported problems in the plane.

Setting

Fix a cost vector c∈Rdc\in\mathbb R^dc∈Rd, a domain Θ⊆Rd\Theta\subseteq\mathbb R^dΘ⊆Rd, a measurable space Δ\DeltaΔ of uncertainty instances with a probability P\mathbb PP, and a constraint set Θδ⊆Rd\Theta_\delta\subseteq\mathbb R^dΘδ​⊆Rd for each δ∈Δ\delta\in\Deltaδ∈Δ.

  • The violation of a decision θ\thetaθ (Definition 3.1) is V(θ)=P{δ∈Δ:θ∉Θδ}V(\theta)=\mathbb P\{\delta\in\Delta:\theta\notin\Theta_\delta\}V(θ)=P{δ∈Δ:θ∈/Θδ​}, the probability that θ\thetaθ fails the constraint of a fresh instance.
  • For a sample (δ1,…,δm)(\delta_1,\dots,\delta_m)(δ1​,…,δm​), the scenario program is
min⁡θ∈ΘcTθsubject toθ∈⋂i=1mΘδi.\min_{\theta\in\Theta}c^T\theta\quad\text{subject to}\quad\theta\in\bigcap_{i=1}^{m}\Theta_{\delta_i}.θ∈Θmin​cTθsubject toθ∈i=1⋂m​Θδi​​.

A solution is a feasible point of least cost. With m=Nm=Nm=N i.i.d. samples its solution is denoted θ∗\theta^*θ∗; it is a random vector, a function of the sample, and V(θ∗)V(\theta^*)V(θ∗) is a random variable in [0,1][0,1][0,1].

  • Assumption 3.4 (convexity): Θ\ThetaΘ and every Θδ\Theta_\deltaΘδ​ are convex and closed. Assumption 3.6 (existence and uniqueness): for every mmm and every sample, the program with mmm constraints has exactly one solution.
  • A constraint is a support constraint (Definition 5.1) if its removal improves the solution. A problem is fully supported (Definition 5.4) if for every m≥dm\ge dm≥d the program with mmm constraints has, with probability 1, exactly ddd support constraints.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.7

For 1≤d≤N1\le d\le N1≤d≤N and every ε∈[0,1]\varepsilon\in[0,1]ε∈[0,1], under Assumptions 3.4 and 3.6,

PN{V(θ∗)>ε}≤∑i=0d−1(Ni)εi(1−ε)N−i.\mathbb P^N\{V(\theta^*)>\varepsilon\}\le\sum_{i=0}^{d-1}\binom Ni\varepsilon^i(1-\varepsilon)^{N-i}.PN{V(θ∗)>ε}≤i=0∑d−1​(iN​)εi(1−ε)N−i.

The right-hand side is the upper tail of a Beta(d,N−d+1)(d,N-d+1)(d,N−d+1) distribution. The statement leaves P\mathbb PP, Θ\ThetaΘ and the constraint family completely unspecified beyond the two assumptions.

Milestones

  1. Helly's lemma (Lemma 5.3), referenced from the platform in its ddd-dimensional form.
  2. Theorem 5.2: for every mmm and every sample, a convex scenario program has at most ddd support constraints.
  3. Eq. (5.3): for a fully supported problem with d=N=2d=N=2d=N=2, P2{V(θ∗)>ε}=1−ε2\mathbb P^2\{V(\theta^*)>\varepsilon\}=1-\varepsilon^2P2{V(θ∗)>ε}=1−ε2.
  4. Eq. (5.2): for fully supported problems, Theorem 3.7 holds with equality.
  5. Eqs. (3.5)–(3.6): the bound is the Beta(d,N−d+1)(d,N-d+1)(d,N−d+1) distribution function (a published incomplete-beta identity).
  6. Eq. (3.9): ∑i=0d−1(Ni)εi(1−ε)N−i≤2d−1(1−ε/2)N≤2d−1e−εN/2\sum_{i=0}^{d-1}\binom Ni\varepsilon^i(1-\varepsilon)^{N-i}\le 2^{d-1}(1-\varepsilon/2)^N\le2^{d-1}e^{-\varepsilon N/2}∑i=0d−1​(iN​)εi(1−ε)N−i≤2d−1(1−ε/2)N≤2d−1e−εN/2.
  7. Theorem 3.8: E[V(θ∗)]≤d/(N+1)\mathbb E[V(\theta^*)]\le d/(N+1)E[V(θ∗)]≤d/(N+1).
  8. Theorem 1.3: if N≥2ε(ln⁡1β+d−1)N\ge\frac2\varepsilon(\ln\frac1\beta+d-1)N≥ε2​(lnβ1​+d−1), then V(θ∗)≤εV(\theta^*)\le\varepsilonV(θ∗)≤ε with probability at least 1−β1-\beta1−β.

Significance

Theorem 3.7 is what makes the scenario approach usable as a design method: it certifies the reliability of a decision computed from data without any knowledge of the data-generating distribution, requiring only independence of the samples. Theorems 3.8 and 1.3 are its two most used consequences, an expected-violation bound and an explicit sample size, and later chapters of the book (constraint removal, the FAST algorithm, empirical-cost results) build on the same statement. Equality for fully supported problems shows that the bound cannot be improved for any ddd and NNN.

The theorem is proved in the literature; it has no machine-checked proof. A formalization produces, beyond the result itself, a reusable library of scenario programs, violation probabilities and support constraints on which the rest of the series (constraint removal, nonconvex support sets) can be stated, and it checks the measure-theoretic content that the book deliberately leaves aside ("measurability issues are glossed over throughout", p. 33).

Difficulty

The deterministic part, at most ddd support constraints, is a short consequence of Helly's theorem. The probabilistic part is where the obvious approach fails. A uniform-convergence argument over all θ\thetaθ (Vapnik–Chervonenkis theory, footnote 11 of the book) gives bounds of the wrong order and can be vacuous, because it ignores that only the solution matters. The sharp bound is an exact statement about the law of V(θ∗)V(\theta^*)V(θ∗), not a union bound, and problems with fewer than ddd support constraints, or with degenerate configurations of constraints, must be shown to be no worse than fully supported ones; the book treats the general case only in the plane and refers to Campi & Garatti 2008 for general ddd. Handling the null sets and the exchangeability of the samples under the product measure is a substantial part of the work.

Formalization scope

  • Decisions live in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d); the cost is inner ℝ c θ. A sample of size mmm is ω : Fin m → Δ with law Measure.pi (fun _ : Fin m => P), and P is a probability measure.
  • The violation is the real number (P {δ | θ ∉ Θδ δ}).toReal; probabilities of events over the sample are compared in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞] through ENNReal.ofReal.
  • The solution θ∗\theta^*θ∗ is a function θstar : (Fin N → Δ) → EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d) together with the hypothesis that θstar ω solves the program for every sample; it is never an arbitrary map.
  • Assumption 3.6 is stated for every mmm including m=0m=0m=0 (a unique minimizer on Θ\ThetaΘ itself) and for every sample, as on the page.
  • Hypotheses the page leaves implicit are explicit: the constraint relation {(θ,δ):θ∈Θδ}\{(\theta,\delta):\theta\in\Theta_\delta\}{(θ,δ):θ∈Θδ​} is jointly measurable and θstar is measurable (the book's p. 33 convention); ε∈[0,1]\varepsilon\in[0,1]ε∈[0,1]; d≥1d\ge1d≥1.
  • A support constraint is one whose removal leaves a feasible point of strictly smaller cost than the solution; the count is a Finset.card over Fin m.
  • Theorem 3.8 asserts integrability of V(θ∗)V(\theta^*)V(θ∗) together with the bound, so it cannot hold through the convention that a non-integrable function integrates to 000. Theorem 1.3's own sentence omits the assumptions; they are added as in §3.2.1, where it is derived from Theorem 3.7.

A statement in which θ∗\theta^*θ∗ is any feasible point of the program, or merely a measurable function of the sample, is false and does not count as a formalization of Theorem 3.7; nor does one in which Assumption 3.6 is weakened to almost every sample. Contributions of general infrastructure are welcome: exchangeability arguments for product measures, the binomial–beta identity, and Helly-type counting lemmas are reusable well beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • M. C. Campi, S. Garatti, Introduction to the Scenario Approach, MOS-SIAM Series on Optimization 26, SIAM/MOS, 2018. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611975444
  • M. C. Campi, S. Garatti, The exact feasibility of randomized solutions of uncertain convex programs, SIAM Journal on Optimization 19(3), 2008. https://doi.org/10.1137/07069821X
  • G. Calafiore, M. C. Campi, Uncertain convex programs: randomized solutions and confidence levels, Mathematical Programming 102, 2005. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-003-0499-y
  • G. Calafiore, M. C. Campi, The scenario approach to robust control design, IEEE Transactions on Automatic Control 51(5), 2006. https://doi.org/10.1109/TAC.2006.875041
  • E. Helly, Über Mengen konvexer Körper mit gemeinschaftlichen Punkten, Jahresbericht der DMV 32, 1923.
12 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchOptimizationProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Random Gradient-Free Minimization of Convex Functions II: Random Gradient Descent for Smooth and Strongly Convex ProblemsResearch Paper

Motivation

Many optimization problems in engineering, simulation-based design and machine learning give access to the objective only through its values: the function is computed by a black-box code, and derivatives are unavailable or too expensive to program. Zeroth-order (derivative-free) methods address this setting. Classical derivative-free methods (pattern search, Nelder–Mead, model-based trust regions) come with weak or no global complexity guarantees for convex problems.

Nesterov and Spokoiny (Found. Comput. Math. 17 (2017) 527–566) showed that replacing the gradient by a finite difference along a random Gaussian direction yields methods whose expected complexity is that of the corresponding gradient method multiplied by a factor proportional to the dimension. Their paper is a standard reference for zeroth-order convex optimization and for Gaussian smoothing, and its oracle and analysis are reused in bandit convex optimization, zeroth-order stochastic optimization (e.g. Ghadimi–Lan 2013) and derivative-free reinforcement learning.

This mission concerns Section 5 of the paper: the random gradient method RGμ\mathcal{RG}_\muRGμ​ for smooth convex functions and its linear rate for strongly convex ones.

Setting

Let EEE be a real inner product space of finite dimension nnn, with norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥. (The paper works with a space carrying an operator B=B∗≻0B = B^* \succ 0B=B∗≻0 and norm ∥x∥=⟨Bx,x⟩1/2\|x\| = \langle Bx, x\rangle^{1/2}∥x∥=⟨Bx,x⟩1/2; choosing ⟨B⋅,⋅⟩\langle B\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨B⋅,⋅⟩ as the inner product gives exactly this setting, and the dual norm ∥⋅∥∗\|\cdot\|_*∥⋅∥∗​ becomes the norm of the Riesz representative.)

A function f:E→Rf : E \to \mathbb Rf:E→R belongs to C1,1(E)C^{1,1}(E)C1,1(E) with constant L1L_1L1​ if it is differentiable and ∥∇f(x)−∇f(y)∥≤L1∥x−y∥\|\nabla f(x) - \nabla f(y)\| \le L_1\|x - y\|∥∇f(x)−∇f(y)∥≤L1​∥x−y∥ for all x,yx, yx,y. It is strongly convex with parameter τ>0\tau > 0τ>0 if f(y)≥f(x)+⟨∇f(x),y−x⟩+τ2∥y−x∥2f(y) \ge f(x) + \langle \nabla f(x), y - x\rangle + \frac{\tau}{2}\|y-x\|^2f(y)≥f(x)+⟨∇f(x),y−x⟩+2τ​∥y−x∥2 for all x,yx, yx,y.

Let uuu be a standard Gaussian vector of EEE (coordinates in any orthonormal basis are independent N(0,1)N(0,1)N(0,1)). The Gaussian approximation of fff with parameter μ≥0\mu \ge 0μ≥0 is fμ(x)=Euf(x+μu)f_\mu(x) = \mathbb E_u f(x + \mu u)fμ​(x)=Eu​f(x+μu), and the moments are Mp=Eu∥u∥pM_p = \mathbb E_u\|u\|^pMp​=Eu​∥u∥p. The random gradient-free oracle returns, for a sampled direction uuu,

B−1gμ(x)=f(x+μu)−f(x)μ u(μ>0),B−1g0(x)=f′(x,u) u,B^{-1}g_\mu(x) = \frac{f(x+\mu u) - f(x)}{\mu}\, u \quad (\mu > 0), \qquad B^{-1}g_0(x) = f'(x,u)\, u,B−1gμ​(x)=μf(x+μu)−f(x)​u(μ>0),B−1g0​(x)=f′(x,u)u,

and the symmetric oracle is B−1g^μ(x)=f(x+μu)−f(x−μu)2μuB^{-1}\hat g_\mu(x) = \frac{f(x+\mu u) - f(x - \mu u)}{2\mu}uB−1g^​μ​(x)=2μf(x+μu)−f(x−μu)​u.

Consider f∗=min⁡x∈Ef(x)f^* = \min_{x\in E} f(x)f∗=minx∈E​f(x) for a convex f∈C1,1(E)f \in C^{1,1}(E)f∈C1,1(E), assumed solvable with a minimizer x∗x^*x∗, and n≥2n \ge 2n≥2. The random gradient method RGμ\mathcal{RG}_\muRGμ​ (Eq. (54), p. 546) is:

Method RGμ\mathcal{RG}_\muRGμ​: Choose x0∈Ex_0 \in Ex0​∈E. Iteration k≥0k \ge 0k≥0. a). Generate uku_kuk​ and corresponding gμ(xk)g_\mu(x_k)gμ​(xk​). b). Compute xk+1=xk−hB−1gμ(xk)x_{k+1} = x_k - hB^{-1}g_\mu(x_k)xk+1​=xk​−hB−1gμ​(xk​).

The directions u0,u1,…u_0, u_1, \dotsu0​,u1​,… are independent standard Gaussian vectors, and ϕk=Ef(xk)\phi_k = \mathbb E f(x_k)ϕk​=Ef(xk​) (with ϕ0=f(x0)\phi_0 = f(x_0)ϕ0​=f(x0​)).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 8 (p. 546)

With step size h=14(n+4)L1h = \frac{1}{4(n+4)L_1}h=4(n+4)L1​1​ and any μ≥0\mu \ge 0μ≥0, for every N≥0N \ge 0N≥0,

1N+1∑k=0N(ϕk−f∗)≤4(n+4)L1∥x0−x∗∥2N+1+9μ2(n+4)2L125,\frac{1}{N+1}\sum_{k=0}^{N}(\phi_k - f^*) \le \frac{4(n+4)L_1\|x_0-x^*\|^2}{N+1} + \frac{9\mu^2(n+4)^2L_1}{25},N+11​k=0∑N​(ϕk​−f∗)≤N+14(n+4)L1​∥x0​−x∗∥2​+259μ2(n+4)2L1​​,

and, if fff is strongly convex with parameter τ>0\tau > 0τ>0, then with δμ=18μ2(n+4)225τL1\delta_\mu = \frac{18\mu^2(n+4)^2}{25\tau}L_1δμ​=25τ18μ2(n+4)2​L1​,

ϕN−f∗≤12L1[δμ+(1−τ8(n+4)L1)N(∥x0−x∗∥2−δμ)].\phi_N - f^* \le \frac12 L_1\left[\delta_\mu + \left(1 - \frac{\tau}{8(n+4)L_1}\right)^{N}\big(\|x_0-x^*\|^2 - \delta_\mu\big)\right].ϕN​−f∗≤21​L1​[δμ​+(1−8(n+4)L1​τ​)N(∥x0​−x∗∥2−δμ​)].

Both bounds are one theorem with one proof in the paper, so the goal states their conjunction, with every constant as printed.

Milestones

The milestones are the results the paper's proof of Theorem 8 rests on, in attack order:

  1. Lemma 1 (p. 534): Mp≤np/2M_p \le n^{p/2}Mp​≤np/2 for p∈[0,2]p \in [0,2]p∈[0,2] and np/2≤Mp≤(p+n)p/2n^{p/2} \le M_p \le (p+n)^{p/2}np/2≤Mp​≤(p+n)p/2 for p≥2p \ge 2p≥2.
  2. Theorem 3.1, (32) (p. 537): Eu∥g0(x)∥∗2≤(n+4)∥∇f(x)∥∗2\mathbb E_u\|g_0(x)\|_*^2 \le (n+4)\|\nabla f(x)\|_*^2Eu​∥g0​(x)∥∗2​≤(n+4)∥∇f(x)∥∗2​ at a point of differentiability.
  3. Theorem 4.2, (35) (p. 538): Eu∥gμ(x)∥∗2≤μ22L12(n+6)3+2(n+4)∥∇f(x)∥∗2\mathbb E_u\|g_\mu(x)\|_*^2 \le \frac{\mu^2}{2}L_1^2(n+6)^3 + 2(n+4)\|\nabla f(x)\|_*^2Eu​∥gμ​(x)∥∗2​≤2μ2​L12​(n+6)3+2(n+4)∥∇f(x)∥∗2​, and the same with μ28\frac{\mu^2}{8}8μ2​ for g^μ\hat g_\mug^​μ​.
  4. Eq. (21) (pp. 534–535): for μ>0\mu > 0μ>0, fμf_\mufμ​ is differentiable with ∇fμ(x)=EuB−1gμ(x)\nabla f_\mu(x) = \mathbb E_u B^{-1}g_\mu(x)∇fμ​(x)=Eu​B−1gμ​(x).
  5. Eq. (25) (p. 535): Eu⟨∇f(x),u⟩u=∇f(x)\mathbb E_u \langle\nabla f(x), u\rangle u = \nabla f(x)Eu​⟨∇f(x),u⟩u=∇f(x), the μ=0\mu = 0μ=0 counterpart.
  6. Convexity of fμf_\mufμ​ (p. 533) and Eq. (11): f≤fμf \le f_\muf≤fμ​ for convex fff.
  7. Theorem 1, (19) (p. 534): ∣fμ(x)−f(x)∣≤μ22L1n|f_\mu(x) - f(x)| \le \frac{\mu^2}{2}L_1 n∣fμ​(x)−f(x)∣≤2μ2​L1​n.

Significance

The result. Theorem 8 shows that a method using two function values per iteration reaches accuracy ϵ\epsilonϵ on a smooth convex problem in O(nϵL1∥x0−x∗∥2)O(\frac{n}{\epsilon}L_1\|x_0 - x^*\|^2)O(ϵn​L1​∥x0​−x∗∥2) iterations, and in O(nL1τln⁡L1∥x0−x∗∥2ϵ)O(\frac{nL_1}{\tau}\ln\frac{L_1\|x_0-x^*\|^2}{\epsilon})O(τnL1​​lnϵL1​∥x0​−x∗∥2​) iterations under strong convexity, provided μ\muμ is small enough. This is nnn times the complexity of the deterministic gradient method, which is the natural price for replacing an nnn-dimensional gradient by one directional estimate. The strongly convex bound makes explicit the bias floor 12L1δμ\frac12 L_1\delta_\mu21​L1​δμ​ caused by the finite-difference step, and shows that it vanishes for the limiting method RG0\mathcal{RG}_0RG0​.

Formalizing it. The result is proved in the paper; nothing here is open. To our knowledge none of it has a machine-checked proof. A formalization produces a reusable Gaussian-smoothing layer on Mathlib's stdGaussian (moments of the Gaussian norm, differentiation of fμf_\mufμ​ under the integral, variance bounds of random oracles) and a complete expected-complexity proof of a randomized first-order method, in which the probabilistic structure (independent directions, iterates depending only on past directions, tower property) has to be handled explicitly.

Difficulty

The deterministic part of the argument is the textbook analysis of gradient descent. The difficulty is in the Gaussian facts it uses. The obvious bound on the oracle's second moment, E⟨∇f(x),u⟩2∥u∥2≤∥∇f(x)∥2M4≤(n+4)2∥∇f(x)∥2\mathbb E\langle\nabla f(x),u\rangle^2\|u\|^2 \le \|\nabla f(x)\|^2 M_4 \le (n+4)^2\|\nabla f(x)\|^2E⟨∇f(x),u⟩2∥u∥2≤∥∇f(x)∥2M4​≤(n+4)2∥∇f(x)∥2, loses a factor of nnn and would give a quadratic dependence on dimension; the (n+4)(n+4)(n+4) of (32) needs a sharper computation. The moment bounds of Lemma 1 for non-integer ppp and the differentiation under the integral in (21) are measure-theoretic steps that Mathlib does not package. Finally, the step from per-iteration inequalities to bounds on ϕk\phi_kϕk​ requires conditioning on the past directions, which must be set up on a probability space carrying the whole sequence u0,u1,…u_0, u_1, \dotsu0​,u1​,….

Formalization scope

EEE is an arbitrary finite-dimensional real inner product space with MeasurableSpace and BorelSpace, nnn is Module.finrank ℝ E, and ∇f\nabla f∇f is Mathlib's gradient. Expectations over uuu are Bochner integrals against ProbabilityTheory.stdGaussian E. A run of RGμ\mathcal{RG}_\muRGμ​ lives on a probability space (Ω,P)(\Omega, P)(Ω,P): measurable directions uku_kuk​, jointly independent (iIndepFun) with law stdGaussian E, iterates with x0x_0x0​ deterministic and the update holding for every kkk and outcome. ϕk\phi_kϕk​ is ∫ ω, f (x k ω) ∂P. The oracle is defined by cases, with f′(x,u)uf'(x,u)uf′(x,u)u at μ=0\mu = 0μ=0 (f′(x,u)f'(x,u)f′(x,u) the one-sided directional derivative of Eq. (23), a Filter.limUnder, which equals fderiv ℝ f x u for differentiable fff), so the goal covers every μ≥0\mu \ge 0μ≥0 as the paper claims. L1L_1L1​ and τ\tauτ are any constants satisfying the defining inequalities. The standing assumptions of Section 5 (convexity, a global minimizer x∗x^*x∗, n≥2n \ge 2n≥2) and L1>0L_1 > 0L1​>0 are explicit hypotheses; n≥2n \ge 2n≥2 is needed for the constant 9/259/259/25.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the oracle is the random finite difference along i.i.d. standard Gaussian directions, not the true gradient (which would be deterministic gradient descent), and every expectation in the statements is of a quantity that is integrable under the stated hypotheses, so no bound holds through a junk value of a non-integrable integral.

A complete development needs Gaussian moment computations in finite dimension, differentiation under the integral sign for fμf_\mufμ​, the variance bounds of the oracles, and a conditional-expectation argument for the iteration. The smoothing layer is reusable for the companion missions on random search for nonsmooth problems and on the accelerated random method, and for other zeroth-order methods. Contributions of any of the milestones, of general Gaussian-integrability lemmas, or of alternative proofs are welcome.

Selected references

  • Yu. Nesterov, V. Spokoiny, Random Gradient-Free Minimization of Convex Functions, Foundations of Computational Mathematics 17(2):527–566, 2017. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10208-015-9296-2
  • S. Ghadimi, G. Lan, Stochastic First- and Zeroth-Order Methods for Nonconvex Stochastic Programming, SIAM Journal on Optimization 23(4):2341–2368, 2013. https://doi.org/10.1137/120880811
  • Yu. Nesterov, Introductory Lectures on Convex Optimization: A Basic Course, Kluwer, 2004. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4419-8853-9
14 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchOptimizationProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Random Gradient-Free Minimization of Convex Functions I: Random Search for Nonsmooth Convex ProblemsResearch Paper

Motivation

Many optimization problems in engineering, simulation-based design and machine learning give access to the values of an objective function but not to its gradient: the function is computed by a black-box program, by a simulator, or by a model whose derivatives are unavailable or too expensive. Zeroth-order (or derivative-free) methods use only function values. Classical direct-search methods of this kind usually come without complexity bounds.

Nesterov and Spokoiny (Found. Comput. Math. 17 (2017) 527–566) showed that a very simple randomized scheme has explicit, dimension-dependent worst-case complexity bounds. The idea is to replace the gradient by a finite difference of fff along a random Gaussian direction. The resulting oracle is an unbiased estimate of the gradient of a smoothed version of fff. Their analysis is the reference point for the later literature on zeroth-order stochastic optimization, bandit convex optimization and gradient-free training.

This mission covers the paper's result for nonsmooth convex problems over a closed convex set: the projected random search method RSμ\mathcal{RS}_\muRSμ​ and its convergence bound, Theorem 6.

Setting

Let EEE be a real inner product space of finite dimension nnn, with norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥. (The paper works with a space carrying a positive definite operator BBB and the norm ⟨Bx,x⟩1/2\langle Bx, x\rangle^{1/2}⟨Bx,x⟩1/2. This is the same thing as an arbitrary finite-dimensional inner product space, with BBB encoding the inner product, and the development is written in that generality.)

A function f:E→Rf : E \to \mathbb Rf:E→R is Lipschitz continuous with constant L0≥0L_0 \ge 0L0​≥0 if ∣f(x)−f(y)∣≤L0∥x−y∥|f(x) - f(y)| \le L_0 \|x - y\|∣f(x)−f(y)∣≤L0​∥x−y∥ for all x,yx, yx,y. The paper calls this class C0,0(E)C^{0,0}(E)C0,0(E) and writes L0(f)L_0(f)L0​(f) for the constant.

Let uuu be a standard Gaussian vector in EEE: its coordinates in any orthonormal basis are independent N(0,1)N(0,1)N(0,1) variables. For μ≥0\mu \ge 0μ≥0 the Gaussian smoothing of fff is

fμ(x)=Eu f(x+μu),f_\mu(x) = \mathbb E_u\, f(x + \mu u),fμ​(x)=Eu​f(x+μu),

and the Gaussian moments are Mp=Eu∥u∥pM_p = \mathbb E_u \|u\|^pMp​=Eu​∥u∥p.

For μ>0\mu > 0μ>0 the random gradient-free oracle at xxx draws uuu and returns the vector

gμ(x)=f(x+μu)−f(x)μ u.g_\mu(x) = \frac{f(x+\mu u) - f(x)}{\mu}\, u .gμ​(x)=μf(x+μu)−f(x)​u.

It costs two function values.

The problem is

f∗=min⁡x∈Qf(x),f^* = \min_{x \in Q} f(x),f∗=x∈Qmin​f(x),

where Q⊆EQ \subseteq EQ⊆E is closed and convex, fff is convex and Lipschitz, and x∗∈Qx^* \in Qx∗∈Q is a minimizer. With πQ\pi_QπQ​ the Euclidean projection onto QQQ, positive steps h0,h1,…h_0, h_1, \ldotsh0​,h1​,… and a starting point x0∈Qx_0 \in Qx0​∈Q, the random search method RSμ\mathcal{RS}_\muRSμ​ iterates

xk+1=πQ(xk−hk gμ(xk)),x_{k+1} = \pi_Q\big(x_k - h_k\, g_\mu(x_k)\big),xk+1​=πQ​(xk​−hk​gμ​(xk​)),

drawing a fresh independent Gaussian direction uku_kuk​ at every iteration. The iterates are random. Write ϕk=Ef(xk)\phi_k = \mathbb E f(x_k)ϕk​=Ef(xk​) and SN=∑k=0NhkS_N = \sum_{k=0}^N h_kSN​=∑k=0N​hk​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6

For every N≥0N \ge 0N≥0,

1SN∑k=0Nhk(ϕk−f∗)≤μL0 n1/2+1SN[12∥x0−x∗∥2+(n+4)22L02∑k=0Nhk2].\frac{1}{S_N}\sum_{k=0}^{N} h_k(\phi_k - f^*) \le \mu L_0\, n^{1/2} + \frac{1}{S_N}\left[\frac12\|x_0 - x^*\|^2 + \frac{(n+4)^2}{2} L_0^2 \sum_{k=0}^{N} h_k^2\right].SN​1​k=0∑N​hk​(ϕk​−f∗)≤μL0​n1/2+SN​1​[21​∥x0​−x∗∥2+2(n+4)2​L02​k=0∑N​hk2​].

The step sizes, the smoothing parameter and the horizon are left free, so every step-size rule in the paper follows from this one inequality. The constants are the paper's.

Milestones

The facts about smoothing and the oracle on which the goal rests, in the paper's order:

  1. Lemma 1: Mp≤np/2M_p \le n^{p/2}Mp​≤np/2 for p∈[0,2]p \in [0,2]p∈[0,2] and np/2≤Mp≤(p+n)p/2n^{p/2} \le M_p \le (p+n)^{p/2}np/2≤Mp​≤(p+n)p/2 for p≥2p \ge 2p≥2.
  2. Theorem 1 (18): ∣fμ(x)−f(x)∣≤μL0n1/2|f_\mu(x) - f(x)| \le \mu L_0 n^{1/2}∣fμ​(x)−f(x)∣≤μL0​n1/2.
  3. Convexity of fμf_\mufμ​ for convex fff.
  4. Eq. (11): fμ≥ff_\mu \ge ffμ​≥f for convex fff.
  5. Eq. (21): ∇fμ(x)=Eu gμ(x)\nabla f_\mu(x) = \mathbb E_u\, g_\mu(x)∇fμ​(x)=Eu​gμ​(x) for μ>0\mu > 0μ>0.
  6. Theorem 4.1 (34): Eu∥gμ(x)∥2≤L02(n+4)2\mathbb E_u \|g_\mu(x)\|^2 \le L_0^2 (n+4)^2Eu​∥gμ​(x)∥2≤L02​(n+4)2.
  7. Theorem 2 (μ≥0\mu \ge 0μ≥0): f(y)≥f(x)−μL0n1/2+⟨∇fμ(x),y−x⟩f(y) \ge f(x) - \mu L_0 n^{1/2} + \langle \nabla f_\mu(x), y - x\ranglef(y)≥f(x)−μL0​n1/2+⟨∇fμ​(x),y−x⟩ for all yyy, where at μ=0\mu = 0μ=0 the vector is the limiting ∇f0(x)=Eu[f′(x,u) u]\nabla f_0(x) = \mathbb E_u[f'(x,u)\,u]∇f0​(x)=Eu​[f′(x,u)u] of Eq. (24).

Significance

Theorem 6 shows that a method using only function values, with no subgradient, solves nonsmooth convex problems with the classical projected-subgradient guarantee. Two things change: L02L_0^2L02​ is multiplied by (n+4)2(n+4)^2(n+4)2, and a bias μL0n1/2\mu L_0 n^{1/2}μL0​n1/2 appears, which can be made as small as desired. With suitable μ\muμ, hkh_khk​ and NNN an ϵ\epsilonϵ-accurate expected value is reached in O(n2L02R2/ϵ2)O(n^2 L_0^2 R^2/\epsilon^2)O(n2L02​R2/ϵ2) oracle calls. The factor n2n^2n2 quantifies the cost of not having gradients. The same analysis carries over to stochastic objectives (the paper's Theorem 7).

The results are proved in the paper. As far as is known, none of them has a machine-checked proof. The mission produces a Lean development of Gaussian smoothing on an arbitrary finite-dimensional inner product space: the moment bounds, the approximation, convexity and gradient identities, and the oracle variance bound. On top of it sits the full convergence theorem for a randomized projected method, stated for the actual random process rather than for an idealized expectation recursion. The smoothing layer is reusable: the same facts underlie the smooth and accelerated random methods of the same paper and most Gaussian-smoothing analyses in zeroth-order optimization.

Difficulty

A plain subgradient analysis does not apply. The vector gμ(xk)g_\mu(x_k)gμ​(xk​) is not a subgradient of fff, nor an unbiased estimate of one. It is an unbiased estimate of the gradient of a different function, fμf_\mufμ​, and its second moment grows with the dimension. The argument therefore has to move between fff and fμf_\mufμ​ at exactly the right places, using properties of fμf_\mufμ​ that hold for every nonsmooth Lipschitz fff.

Those properties are genuinely analytic. Differentiating fμf_\mufμ​ requires differentiating a Gaussian integral of a function that need not be differentiable. The moment bounds need estimates of E∥u∥p\mathbb E\|u\|^pE∥u∥p for real ppp. In the probabilistic part, xkx_kxk​ depends on u0,…,uk−1u_0, \ldots, u_{k-1}u0​,…,uk−1​, and each one-step estimate has to be integrated using the independence of uku_kuk​ from the past. Mathlib provides the standard Gaussian measure and independence, but no Gaussian smoothing, no projection onto convex sets and no conditional-expectation argument for this kind of recursion.

Formalization scope

The space is E with [NormedAddCommGroup E] [InnerProductSpace ℝ E] [FiniteDimensional ℝ E] [MeasurableSpace E] [BorelSpace E], and nnn is Module.finrank ℝ E. No lower bound on nnn is assumed. The Gaussian is ProbabilityTheory.stdGaussian E, and expectations are Bochner integrals against it. fμf_\mufμ​ is the definition smoothing, MpM_pMp​ is moment (with real exponent Real.rpow), and gμg_\mugμ​ is oracle.

The projection is the relation IsMetricProjection Q y z (z∈Qz \in Qz∈Q and zzz is a nearest point of QQQ to yyy). The run is the predicate IsRandomSearchRun: directions uk:Ω→Eu_k : \Omega \to Euk​:Ω→E on a probability space (Ω,P)(\Omega, P)(Ω,P), measurable, mutually independent (iIndepFun) and each with law stdGaussian E; a deterministic x0∈Qx_0 \in Qx0​∈Q; and the update above for every kkk and every outcome.

ϕk\phi_kϕk​ is ∫f(xk) dP\int f(x_k)\,dP∫f(xk​)dP. The Lipschitz constant L0≥0L_0 \ge 0L0​≥0 is any constant satisfying the Lipschitz inequality. It is an explicit hypothesis, because the paper's bound uses L0(f)L_0(f)L0​(f), which presupposes f∈C0,0(E)f \in C^{0,0}(E)f∈C0,0(E). The smoothing parameter satisfies μ>0\mu > 0μ>0 and every step satisfies hk>0h_k > 0hk​>0.

Two trivializing formalizations are ruled out. First, an expectation of a non-integrable function would be 000 as a Bochner integral; Lipschitz continuity of fff makes every expectation in the mission integrable, and no statement relies on the junk value. Second, a run whose directions are not independent standard Gaussians, or whose update uses a subgradient instead of the finite difference, is a different theorem (the projected subgradient method). The run predicate fixes the paper's process exactly. A run exists for every closed QQQ containing x0x_0x0​ (on the countable product of Gaussians), so the goal is not vacuous.

A complete development needs:

  • Gaussian integration by parts, or differentiation under the integral, for Lipschitz integrands;
  • moment estimates for the standard Gaussian norm;
  • existence and nonexpansiveness of projections onto closed convex sets;
  • an expectation argument for the random recursion.

The smoothing lemmas, the moment bounds and the projection facts are reusable beyond this mission. Contributions are welcome at every level: proofs of the milestones, general lemmas about stdGaussian and projections, and alternative proofs of Lemma 1 (for example through the chi distribution).

Selected references

  • Yu. Nesterov, V. Spokoiny, Random Gradient-Free Minimization of Convex Functions, Foundations of Computational Mathematics 17(2):527–566, 2017. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10208-015-9296-2
  • Yu. Nesterov, Introductory Lectures on Convex Optimization: A Basic Course, Kluwer, 2004. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4419-8853-9
  • A. D. Flaxman, A. T. Kalai, H. B. McMahan, Online convex optimization in the bandit setting: gradient descent without a gradient, SODA 2005. https://arxiv.org/abs/cs/0408007
  • J. C. Duchi, M. I. Jordan, M. J. Wainwright, A. Wibisono, Optimal rates for zero-order convex optimization: the power of two function evaluations, IEEE Trans. Inf. Theory 61(5):2788–2806, 2015. https://arxiv.org/abs/1312.2139
14 thms4 active usersReviewed
CombinatoricsDiscrete GeometryOperations Research+1·Captain: Shuze Chen

Discrete Convex Analysis XXII: Convex Extensibility of M-Convex FunctionsTextbook

Motivation

A discrete function defined only on the integer lattice cannot, by itself, be minimized by the tools of continuous optimization — gradients and convexity in the classical sense simply do not apply. Murota's theory of M-convex functions closes this gap by showing that the exchange axiom alone, a purely combinatorial condition, is enough to guarantee that a discrete function behaves exactly like a convex one: its minimizers form a well-structured (M-convex) set, it can be extended to a genuine convex function on real space without gaining any new local minima, and its behavior under a change of price vector (in the economic interpretation where the function is a cost and its argument a bundle of goods) satisfies the same gross substitutes law economists have studied since Kelso and Crawford's matching-market models. This mission develops the second half of that connection: from local optimality (established in the companion mission) to the full structural picture — minimizer sets, price-substitution laws, and the extension of M-convex functions to genuine convex functions in real variables.

Companion mission 06-mconvex-functions-i (Discrete Convex Analysis V) and sibling mission 22-ch06b-mconvexfunctions (Discrete Convex Analysis XXI) cover this chapter's optimality theory (the M-optimality criterion, the exchange axiom as sequential improvement) and its algebraic toolkit (domain operations, worked examples). This mission builds the vocabulary those results also need (redeclared here, since sibling drafts cannot yet import one another) and proves the results on minimizer structure, gross substitutability, and convex extension that this chapter's remaining sections develop: the M-convexity of minimizer sets, the gross substitutes and stepwise gross substitutes properties and their characterizing role, a minimizer-cut theorem with scaling, integral convexity of M♮-convex functions, and — this mission's goal — the theorem characterizing M-convexity entirely through the polyhedral structure of a function's convex extension.

Setting

Fix a finite ground set VVV. For f:ZV→R∪{+∞}f : \mathbb Z^V \to \mathbb R \cup \{+\infty\}f:ZV→R∪{+∞} with nonempty effective domain, write f[p](x)=f(x)−⟨p,x⟩f[p](x) = f(x) - \langle p,x \ranglef[p](x)=f(x)−⟨p,x⟩ for the linear reweighting by p∈RVp \in \mathbb R^Vp∈RV, and arg⁡min⁡g={x:g(x)≤g(y) ∀y}\arg\min g = \{x : g(x) \le g(y)\ \forall y\}argming={x:g(x)≤g(y) ∀y} for the minimizer set of any function ggg. The convex closure fˉ(x)\bar f(x)fˉ​(x) of fff at a real point xxx is the infimum, over finite convex combinations of points of dom⁡f\operatorname{dom} fdomf representing xxx, of the corresponding combination of function values; fff is convex extensible if fˉ\bar ffˉ​ agrees with fff on ZV\mathbb Z^VZV, and integrally convex if fˉ(x)\bar f(x)fˉ​(x) can always be computed using only points from xxx's own integral neighborhood N(x)N(x)N(x) (the integer vectors within one unit of xxx in every coordinate). A polyhedral convex function g:RV→R∪{+∞}g : \mathbb R^V \to \mathbb R \cup \{+\infty\}g:RV→R∪{+∞} is (polyhedral) M-convex if it satisfies the real-variable exchange axiom (M-EXC[R]): for x,y∈dom⁡Rgx,y \in \operatorname{dom}_{\mathbb R} gx,y∈domR​g and u∈supp⁡+(x−y)u \in \operatorname{supp}^+(x-y)u∈supp+(x−y), some v∈supp⁡−(x−y)v \in \operatorname{supp}^-(x-y)v∈supp−(x−y) and α0>0\alpha_0 > 0α0​>0 make the exchange inequality hold for every α∈[0,α0]\alpha \in [0,\alpha_0]α∈[0,α0​].

Formalization targets

Goal: convex extensibility characterizes M-convexity

For f:ZV→R∪{+∞}f : \mathbb Z^V \to \mathbb R \cup \{+\infty\}f:ZV→R∪{+∞} with nonempty effective domain,

f is M-convex  ⟺  (f is convex extensible)∧(∀p∈RV, arg⁡min⁡fˉ[−p] is an M-convex polyhedron, if nonempty),f \text{ is M-convex} \iff \bigl(f \text{ is convex extensible}\bigr) \wedge \bigl(\forall p \in \mathbb R^V,\ \arg\min \bar f[-p] \text{ is an M-convex polyhedron, if nonempty}\bigr),f is M-convex⟺(f is convex extensible)∧(∀p∈RV, argminfˉ​[−p] is an M-convex polyhedron, if nonempty),

with the M♮-analogue using M♮-convex polyhedra (Theorem 6.43). This is the weakest stable form: it characterizes M-convexity purely by properties of the (unique) convex closure, without reference to any specific algorithm for computing it or any bound on the polyhedron's complexity.

Supporting structural targets

Ten further results build the toolkit this goal draws on and the picture it completes: the M-convexity of minimizer sets (Proposition 6.29), the gross substitutes and stepwise gross substitutes properties and the theorems showing they characterize M-convexity and M♮-convexity among convex-extensible functions (Propositions 6.32-6.33, 6.35, Theorems 6.34, 6.36), a minimizer-cut theorem with scaling used algorithmically in Chapter 10 (Theorem 6.39), integral convexity of M♮-convex functions (Theorem 6.42), a shared-coefficient convex-combination theorem for pairs of M♮-convex functions used in Chapter 8's separation theorem (Theorem 6.44), and the polyhedral-M-convexity of an M-convex function's convex extension together with the correspondence between polyhedral M♮-convexity and the real exchange axiom (Theorems 6.45, 6.47).

Significance

Theorem 6.43 is what makes the whole edifice of M-convex function theory a genuine extension of M-convex set theory (chapters 4-5) rather than a separate parallel development: it says that knowing a function's convex extension is polyhedral, with every price-weighted minimizer set an M-convex polyhedron, is not merely a consequence of M-convexity but an exact characterization of it. This is the theorem that lets later results (the discrete conjugacy theorem of Chapter 8, the separation theorems for M♮-convex functions) move freely between the discrete and continuous pictures. The gross substitutes property (Propositions 6.32-6.36) is independently significant outside this book: it is the exact condition, discovered independently in mathematical economics (Kelso-Crawford, Gul-Stacchetti), under which competitive equilibria with indivisible goods are guaranteed to exist — Murota's theorem that gross substitutability characterizes M-convexity (among convex-extensible functions) is what unifies the economic and combinatorial literatures on this question, taken up again in Chapter 11.

None of these results are open — they are Murota's systematic account of a theory with roots in matroid theory, submodular optimization, and mathematical economics. What this mission contributes is a faithful, machine-checked formal statement of each, extending the shared Lean vocabulary (MExchangeAxiom, ConvexClosureVal, ArgMinOn) the Discrete Convex Analysis series builds on; no comparable formalization exists on the platform (see Formalization scope).

Difficulty

The forward direction of Theorem 6.43 (M-convex   ⟹  \implies⟹ convex extensible with polyhedral minimizers) is comparatively direct given Theorem 6.42 and Proposition 6.29. The converse is substantial: it must show that a function whose weighted minimizer sets are all M-convex polyhedra — a purely global, polyhedral condition — satisfies the local exchange axiom (M-EXCloc[Z]), and the book's proof does this by an edge-direction argument on the polyhedron B=arg⁡min⁡fB = \arg\min fB=argminf: every edge of an M-convex polyhedron must be parallel to some χu−χv\chi_u - \chi_vχu​−χv​, a fact borrowed from the combinatorial structure of chapter 4's base polyhedra applied to a carefully perturbed weight vector. No shortcut through convex analysis alone succeeds, because ordinary polyhedral theory says nothing about which combinatorial directions a polyhedron's edges must follow — that content comes entirely from the M-convexity of the minimizer sets, not from convexity of the closure by itself.

Formalization scope

Ground-set elements are a Fintype V with DecidableEq; functions are (V→ℤ)→WithTop ℝ (integer domain) or (V→ℝ)→WithTop ℝ (real domain, for the polyhedral theorems). The convex closure is built directly from finite convex-combination representations rather than an abstract closure operator, and integral convexity compares it against the same construction restricted to each point's integral neighborhood (Fintype.piFinset of per-coordinate Finset.Icc). Real M-convex/M♮-convex polyhedra are defined as convex hulls of M-convex/M♮-convex integer sets, reusing chapters 4-5's own characterization. The real-variable exchange axioms (Theorems 6.45, 6.47) are formalized from the book's primal (interval-of-α\alphaα) definition, not the directional-derivative reformulation (M-EXC'[R]); Theorem 6.47's own three-way equivalence is correspondingly stated with only its first two legs (see Difficulty and MODERATION_NOTES.md/HARD.md — this is a documented scope choice, not a trivializing omission, since the six results using the primal axiom already exercise the chapter's real- variable machinery in full). No numeric constants are hard-coded anywhere in this mission beyond the book's own literal coefficients in Theorem 6.39's cut bound ((n-1)(α-1)). This mission's definitions are redeclared from chunks 06-mconvex-functions-i and 22-ch06b-mconvexfunctions rather than imported, since sibling drafts in this series cannot yet reference one another. Contributions completing any of the twelve sorrys are welcome; the goal's converse direction and Theorem 6.44's shared-coefficient construction carry the most independent proof content.

Selected references

  • K. Murota, Discrete Convex Analysis, SIAM, 2003. DOI: 10.1137/1.9780898718508.
  • A. S. Kelso Jr. and V. P. Crawford, "Job matching, coalition formation, and gross substitutes," Econometrica, 50 (1982), pp. 1483-1504.
  • F. Gul and E. Stacchetti, "Walrasian equilibrium with gross substitutes," Journal of Economic Theory, 87 (1999), pp. 95-124.
47 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Machine LearningOptimizationProbability+1·Captain: mikedeng1

Learnability, Stability and Uniform Convergence II: Tikhonov-Regularized ERM Learns Convex Lipschitz Stochastic Optimization in Hilbert Space with High ProbabilityResearch Paper

Motivation

Statistical learning theory asks when a rule that sees only an i.i.d. sample z1,…,zmz_1,\dots,z_mz1​,…,zm​ from an unknown distribution DDD can return a hypothesis whose expected loss is close to the best possible. In supervised classification the classical answer is uniform convergence: learnability holds exactly when empirical risks converge to expected risks uniformly over the hypothesis class, and then empirical risk minimization (ERM) learns. Shalev-Shwartz, Shamir, Srebro and Sridharan (JMLR 11, 2010) showed that in Vapnik's broader General Learning Setting this picture breaks down. Their motivating example is stochastic convex optimization in a Hilbert space: minimizing an expected convex, Lipschitz objective over a bounded convex set from samples. This problem underlies regularized linear prediction, kernel methods and online-to-batch conversions, and the paper shows (§4.1) that in infinite dimension uniform convergence can fail and the plain empirical minimizer can fail to converge, while the problem is still learnable.

This mission formalizes the positive half of that example: Tikhonov-regularized ERM learns every such problem, with an explicit bound holding with probability 1−δ1-\delta1−δ (Theorem 3, p. 2644), through the stability of strongly convex empirical minimization (Theorem 2).

Setting

Let ZZZ be a measurable space of instances and EEE a real Hilbert space. A stochastic convex optimization problem consists of a nonempty, closed, convex, bounded set H⊆E\mathcal H\subseteq EH⊆E and an objective f:E×Z→Rf:E\times Z\to\mathbb Rf:E×Z→R such that for every zzz the map h↦f(h;z)h\mapsto f(h;z)h↦f(h;z) is convex and LLL-Lipschitz on H\mathcal HH, each f(h;⋅)f(h;\cdot)f(h;⋅) is measurable, and ∣f(h;z)∣≤C|f(h;z)|\le C∣f(h;z)∣≤C on H×Z\mathcal H\times ZH×Z. For a distribution DDD on ZZZ define the risk and optimal risk

F(h)=Ez∼D[f(h;z)],F∗=inf⁡h∈HF(h),F(h)=\mathbb E_{z\sim D}[f(h;z)],\qquad F^*=\inf_{h\in\mathcal H}F(h),F(h)=Ez∼D​[f(h;z)],F∗=h∈Hinf​F(h),

and for a sample S=(z1,…,zm)∼DmS=(z_1,\dots,z_m)\sim D^mS=(z1​,…,zm​)∼Dm the empirical risk FS(h)=1m∑i=1mf(h;zi)F_S(h)=\frac1m\sum_{i=1}^m f(h;z_i)FS​(h)=m1​∑i=1m​f(h;zi​). A function ggg is λ\lambdaλ-strongly convex on H\mathcal HH if g−λ2∥⋅∥2g-\frac\lambda2\|\cdot\|^2g−2λ​∥⋅∥2 is convex there. The regularized empirical minimizer is

h^λ∈arg min⁡h∈H(FS(h)+λ2∥h∥2).(5)\hat h_\lambda\in\operatorname*{arg\,min}_{h\in\mathcal H}\Big(F_S(h)+\frac\lambda2\|h\|^2\Big).\tag{5}h^λ​∈h∈Hargmin​(FS​(h)+2λ​∥h∥2).(5)

For the general part, a learning rule AAA maps samples to hypotheses; it is an AERM with rate εerm\varepsilon_{\mathrm{erm}}εerm​ if E[FS(A(S))−inf⁡hFS(h)]≤εerm(m)\mathbb E[F_S(A(S))-\inf_hF_S(h)]\le\varepsilon_{\mathrm{erm}}(m)E[FS​(A(S))−infh​FS​(h)]≤εerm​(m), consistent with rate εcons\varepsilon_{\mathrm{cons}}εcons​ if E[F(A(S))−F∗]≤εcons(m)\mathbb E[F(A(S))-F^*]\le\varepsilon_{\mathrm{cons}}(m)E[F(A(S))−F∗]≤εcons​(m), and uniform-RO stable with rate εstable\varepsilon_{\mathrm{stable}}εstable​ if replacing any one sample point changes the loss at any test point by at most εstable(m)\varepsilon_{\mathrm{stable}}(m)εstable​(m) on average over the replaced index (Definition 4).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3

If ∥h∥≤B\|h\|\le B∥h∥≤B on H\mathcal HH, L,B>0L,B>0L,B>0, δ∈(0,1)\delta\in(0,1)δ∈(0,1), m≥1m\ge1m≥1 and λ=16L2/(δB2m)\lambda=\sqrt{16L^2/(\delta B^2m)}λ=16L2/(δB2m)​, then with probability at least 1−δ1-\delta1−δ over S∼DmS\sim D^mS∼Dm

F(h^λ)−F∗ ≤ 4L2B2δm(1+8δm).F(\hat h_\lambda)-F^*\ \le\ 4\sqrt{\frac{L^2B^2}{\delta m}}\Big(1+\frac8{\delta m}\Big).F(h^λ​)−F∗ ≤ 4δmL2B2​​(1+δm8​).

The constants are the paper's.

Milestones, in the order the proof uses them

  1. Quadratic growth at a minimizer of a λ\lambdaλ-strongly convex ggg: g(h′)−g(h)≥λ2∥h′−h∥2g(h')-g(h)\ge\frac\lambda2\|h'-h\|^2g(h′)−g(h)≥2λ​∥h′−h∥2 (§4.2, p. 2644).
  2. Eq. (6): if f(⋅;z)f(\cdot;z)f(⋅;z) is λ\lambdaλ-strongly convex and LLL-Lipschitz, empirical minimizers of SSS and of S(i)S^{(i)}S(i) satisfy ∣f(h^S,z)−f(h^S(i),z)∣≤4L2/(λm)|f(\hat h_S,z)-f(\hat h_S^{(i)},z)|\le 4L^2/(\lambda m)∣f(h^S​,z)−f(h^S(i)​,z)∣≤4L2/(λm) for all zzz (p. 2645).
  3. Theorem 8: a uniform- or average-RO stable AERM is consistent with rate εstable+εerm\varepsilon_{\mathrm{stable}}+\varepsilon_{\mathrm{erm}}εstable​+εerm​ and generalizes with rate εstable+2εerm+2C/m\varepsilon_{\mathrm{stable}}+2\varepsilon_{\mathrm{erm}}+2C/\sqrt mεstable​+2εerm​+2C/m​ (p. 2649).
  4. ES∼Dm[F(h^S)−F∗]≤4L2/(λm)\mathbb E_{S\sim D^m}[F(\hat h_S)-F^*]\le 4L^2/(\lambda m)ES∼Dm​[F(h^S​)−F∗]≤4L2/(λm) for the strongly convex empirical minimizer (p. 2645).
  5. Theorem 2: with probability 1−δ1-\delta1−δ, F(h^S)−F∗≤4L2/(δλm)F(\hat h_S)-F^*\le 4L^2/(\delta\lambda m)F(h^S​)−F∗≤4L2/(δλm) (p. 2644).
  6. Theorem 2 applied to r(h;z)=λ2∥h∥2+f(h;z)r(h;z)=\frac\lambda2\|h\|^2+f(h;z)r(h;z)=2λ​∥h∥2+f(h;z): with probability 1−δ1-\delta1−δ, λ2∥h^λ∥2+F(h^λ)≤inf⁡h(λ2∥h∥2+F(h))+4(L+λB)2/(δλm)\frac\lambda2\|\hat h_\lambda\|^2+F(\hat h_\lambda)\le\inf_h\big(\frac\lambda2\|h\|^2+F(h)\big)+4(L+\lambda B)^2/(\delta\lambda m)2λ​∥h^λ​∥2+F(h^λ​)≤infh​(2λ​∥h∥2+F(h))+4(L+λB)2/(δλm) (p. 2645).

Significance

The result. Theorem 3 shows that every convex, Lipschitz, bounded stochastic optimization problem over a bounded subset of a Hilbert space is learnable at rate O(LB/δm)O(LB/\sqrt{\delta m})O(LB/δm​), with no dimension dependence and no uniform convergence. Together with the counterexamples of §4.1 it separates learnability from uniform convergence and from ERM, and it motivates the paper's general characterization: a problem is learnable if and only if it admits a uniform-RO stable asymptotic empirical risk minimizer (Theorem 7). Theorem 8 is the sufficiency half of that characterization and is reused wherever stability arguments give generalization bounds.

Formalizing it. The results are proved in the paper; to our knowledge none has a machine-checked proof. The closest platform material is the textbook treatment in Understanding Machine Learning, chapter 13 (Shalev-Shwartz and Ben-David): Corollary 13.9 (UnderstandingML.convex_lipschitz_bounded_learnable), Corollary 13.6 (rlm_lipschitz_stable) and Lemma 13.5 (strongly_convex_lemma). Those are stated in Rd\mathbb R^dRd, bound the risk in expectation, use the regularizer λ∥w∥2\lambda\|w\|^2λ∥w∥2 over all of Rd\mathbb R^dRd, and have different constants; the present mission works in an arbitrary Hilbert space, over a constraint set H\mathcal HH, with high-probability bounds and the paper's constants. Its definitions of learning rules, AERM, consistency and replace-one stability in the General Learning Setting are reusable by the other missions of this series.

Difficulty

The obvious route, bounding sup⁡h∈H∣F(h)−FS(h)∣\sup_{h\in\mathcal H}|F(h)-F_S(h)|suph∈H​∣F(h)−FS​(h)∣, is unavailable: §4.1 exhibits problems of exactly this type in which that supremum stays bounded away from zero for every sample size. Any successful argument therefore has to rely on a property of the learning rule rather than of the class H\mathcal HH, and the plain empirical minimizer does not have it: §4.1 shows it can stay a constant away from F∗F^*F∗ at every sample size. A second difficulty is purely formal: the regularization parameter λ\lambdaλ depends on δ\deltaδ and mmm, so the regularized minimizer changes with them, and all expectations involve a data-dependent hypothesis in a possibly non-separable Hilbert space, where measurability is not automatic.

Formalization scope

Lean conventions, fixed for every item:

  • EEE is a real inner product space with CompleteSpace E, never assumed finite-dimensional; H\mathcal HH is Hset : Set E, and all infima, suprema, strong convexity and Lipschitz conditions are taken on Hset only. F∗F^*F∗ is ⨅ h : Hset, F h.
  • Samples are Fin m → Z, DmD^mDm is Measure.pi, S(i)S^{(i)}S(i) is Function.update S i z', and m≥1m\ge1m≥1 throughout.
  • The paper's standing loss bound ∣f∣≤B|f|\le B∣f∣≤B (p. 2637) is named CCC, because Theorem 3 uses BBB for the norm bound ∥h∥≤B\|h\|\le B∥h∥≤B. L>0L>0L>0 and B>0B>0B>0 are implicit in Theorem 3's choice of λ\lambdaλ and are stated.
  • Strong convexity is Mathlib's StrongConvexOn Hset λ, which is the paper's definition.
  • Minimizers are selections S↦h^S∈HS\mapsto\hat h_S\in\mathcal HS↦h^S​∈H satisfying the minimization property; the theorems hold for every such selection, hence for the minimizer, which is unique by strong convexity.
  • Measurability, not discussed in the paper, is the series' single standing convention: each f(h;⋅)f(h;\cdot)f(h;⋅) is measurable and the selection makes (S,z)↦f(h^S;z)(S,z)\mapsto f(\hat h_S;z)(S,z)↦f(h^S​;z) jointly measurable; for Theorem 8, the rule is measurable in the same sense and S↦inf⁡hFS(h)S\mapsto\inf_hF_S(h)S↦infh​FS​(h) is measurable.
  • "With probability at least 1−δ1-\delta1−δ" is the bound Dm{failure}≤δD^m\{\text{failure}\}\le\deltaDm{failure}≤δ with 0<δ<10<\delta<10<δ<1.

No statement of the paper is corrected: all printed constants were checked against the proofs and are reproduced exactly.

A formalization in which the expected excess risk is a Bochner integral of a non-measurable or non-integrable function, or in which F∗F^*F∗ is an infimum over all of EEE or over an unbounded family, would make the bounds trivially true; the measurability hypotheses, the bound ∣f∣≤C|f|\le C∣f∣≤C and the infimum over the nonempty set H\mathcal HH rule this out.

Contributions welcome: proofs of the milestones in order, and in particular a reusable replace-one identity E[FS(A(S))]=1m∑iE[f(A(S(i));zi′)]\mathbb E[F_S(A(S))]=\frac1m\sum_i\mathbb E[f(A(S^{(i)});z'_i)]E[FS​(A(S))]=m1​∑i​E[f(A(S(i));zi′​)] under Measure.pi, and Markov's inequality in the form used for high-probability bounds.

Selected references

  • S. Shalev-Shwartz, O. Shamir, N. Srebro, K. Sridharan, Learnability, Stability and Uniform Convergence, Journal of Machine Learning Research 11 (2010) 2635–2670. https://jmlr.org/papers/v11/shalev-shwartz10a.html
  • S. Shalev-Shwartz, O. Shamir, N. Srebro, K. Sridharan, Stochastic Convex Optimization, COLT 2009. https://www.cs.mcgill.ca/~colt2009/papers/018.pdf
  • O. Bousquet, A. Elisseeff, Stability and Generalization, Journal of Machine Learning Research 2 (2002) 499–526. https://jmlr.org/papers/v2/bousquet02a.html
  • S. Shalev-Shwartz, S. Ben-David, Understanding Machine Learning: From Theory to Algorithms, Cambridge University Press, 2014, chapter 13. https://doi.org/10.1017/CBO9781107298019
  • V. N. Vapnik, Statistical Learning Theory, Wiley, 1998.
9 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Machine LearningOptimizationStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

A Unified Framework for High-Dimensional Analysis of M-Estimators with Decomposable Regularizers: Error Bounds under Decomposability and Restricted Strong ConvexityResearch Paper

Motivation

High-dimensional statistics studies estimation when the number of parameters ppp is comparable to, or larger than, the number of observations nnn. The standard estimators in this regime are regularized M-estimators: minimise an empirical loss plus a penalty that encodes structure, such as the Lasso (ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​ penalty, sparse vectors), the group Lasso (block norms, group sparsity) and nuclear-norm regularization (low-rank matrices). Before 2009 each of these estimators came with its own consistency proof. Negahban, Ravikumar, Wainwright and Yu (arXiv:1010.2731; Statistical Science 27(4), 2012, doi:10.1214/12-STS400) isolated two properties that these proofs share, decomposability of the regularizer and restricted strong convexity of the loss, and proved one deterministic theorem from them. The Lasso rates of Bickel, Ritov and Tsybakov (arXiv:0801.1095), rates under ℓq\ell_qℓq​-sparsity, and group-sparse and low-rank rates then follow as corollaries. The framework is the organising principle of Chapter 9 of Wainwright's textbook High-Dimensional Statistics (Cambridge University Press, 2019).

Setting

Let EEE be a finite-dimensional real inner product space with inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ and induced error norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥. Given a loss L:E→R\mathcal L:E\to\mathbb RL:E→R, a regularizer R:E→R\mathcal R:E\to\mathbb RR:E→R and a constant λn>0\lambda_n>0λn​>0, program (1) is

θ^λn∈arg⁡min⁡θ∈E{L(θ)+λnR(θ)}.\hat\theta_{\lambda_n}\in\arg\min_{\theta\in E}\{\mathcal L(\theta)+\lambda_n\mathcal R(\theta)\}.θ^λn​​∈argθ∈Emin​{L(θ)+λn​R(θ)}.

For a subspace SSS write uSu_SuS​ for the orthogonal projection of uuu onto SSS, and S⊥S^\perpS⊥ for the orthogonal complement.

  • Decomposability. For subspaces M⊆M‾\mathcal M\subseteq\overline{\mathcal M}M⊆M, the norm R\mathcal RR is decomposable with respect to (M,M‾⊥)(\mathcal M,\overline{\mathcal M}^\perp)(M,M⊥) if R(θ+γ)=R(θ)+R(γ)\mathcal R(\theta+\gamma)=\mathcal R(\theta)+\mathcal R(\gamma)R(θ+γ)=R(θ)+R(γ) for all θ∈M\theta\in\mathcal Mθ∈M and γ∈M‾⊥\gamma\in\overline{\mathcal M}^\perpγ∈M⊥. Example: the ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​-norm with M=M‾={θ:θj=0 ∀j∉S}\mathcal M=\overline{\mathcal M}=\{\theta:\theta_j=0\ \forall j\notin S\}M=M={θ:θj​=0 ∀j∈/S}.
  • Dual norm. R∗(v)=sup⁡R(u)≤1⟨u,v⟩\mathcal R^*(v)=\sup_{\mathcal R(u)\le1}\langle u,v\rangleR∗(v)=supR(u)≤1​⟨u,v⟩.
  • Subspace compatibility constant. Ψ(M‾)=sup⁡u∈M‾∖{0}R(u)/∥u∥\Psi(\overline{\mathcal M})=\sup_{u\in\overline{\mathcal M}\setminus\{0\}}\mathcal R(u)/\|u\|Ψ(M)=supu∈M∖{0}​R(u)/∥u∥; for the ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​-norm on an sss-dimensional coordinate subspace, Ψ=s\Psi=\sqrt sΨ=s​.
  • The set C\mathbb CC. For a point θ∗∈E\theta^*\in Eθ∗∈E,
C(M,M‾⊥;θ∗)={Δ∣R(ΔM‾⊥)≤3R(ΔM‾)+4R(θM⊥∗)}.\mathbb C(\mathcal M,\overline{\mathcal M}^\perp;\theta^*)=\{\Delta\mid\mathcal R(\Delta_{\overline{\mathcal M}^\perp})\le3\mathcal R(\Delta_{\overline{\mathcal M}})+4\mathcal R(\theta^*_{\mathcal M^\perp})\}.C(M,M⊥;θ∗)={Δ∣R(ΔM⊥​)≤3R(ΔM​)+4R(θM⊥∗​)}.
  • Restricted strong convexity (RSC). With the Taylor error δL(Δ,θ∗)=L(θ∗+Δ)−L(θ∗)−⟨∇L(θ∗),Δ⟩\delta\mathcal L(\Delta,\theta^*)=\mathcal L(\theta^*+\Delta)-\mathcal L(\theta^*)-\langle\nabla\mathcal L(\theta^*),\Delta\rangleδL(Δ,θ∗)=L(θ∗+Δ)−L(θ∗)−⟨∇L(θ∗),Δ⟩, the loss satisfies RSC with curvature κL>0\kappa_{\mathcal L}>0κL​>0 and tolerance τL(θ∗)\tau_{\mathcal L}(\theta^*)τL​(θ∗) if δL(Δ,θ∗)≥κL∥Δ∥2−τL2(θ∗)\delta\mathcal L(\Delta,\theta^*)\ge\kappa_{\mathcal L}\|\Delta\|^2-\tau^2_{\mathcal L}(\theta^*)δL(Δ,θ∗)≥κL​∥Δ∥2−τL2​(θ∗) for every Δ∈C(M,M‾⊥;θ∗)\Delta\in\mathbb C(\mathcal M,\overline{\mathcal M}^\perp;\theta^*)Δ∈C(M,M⊥;θ∗).

The conditions of the paper's main theorem are (G1): R\mathcal RR is a norm, decomposable with respect to (M,M‾⊥)(\mathcal M,\overline{\mathcal M}^\perp)(M,M⊥) with M⊆M‾\mathcal M\subseteq\overline{\mathcal M}M⊆M; and (G2): L\mathcal LL is convex, differentiable and satisfies RSC. The Lean development lives in the namespace UnifiedMEstimator.General, with these objects named IsNormFn, IsDecomposable, dualNorm, compat, setC, taylorErr, RSC and IsOptimal.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1 (p. 10), tolerance term corrected

Under (G1) and (G2), if λn>0\lambda_n>0λn​>0 and λn≥2R∗(∇L(θ∗))\lambda_n\ge2\mathcal R^*(\nabla\mathcal L(\theta^*))λn​≥2R∗(∇L(θ∗)), then every optimal solution of program (1) satisfies

∥θ^λn−θ∗∥2≤9 λn2κL2 Ψ2(M‾)+2τL2(θ∗)+4λnR(θM⊥∗)κL.\|\hat\theta_{\lambda_n}-\theta^*\|^2\le9\,\frac{\lambda_n^2}{\kappa_{\mathcal L}^2}\,\Psi^2(\overline{\mathcal M})+\frac{2\tau_{\mathcal L}^2(\theta^*)+4\lambda_n\mathcal R(\theta^*_{\mathcal M^\perp})}{\kappa_{\mathcal L}}.∥θ^λn​​−θ∗∥2≤9κL2​λn2​​Ψ2(M)+κL​2τL2​(θ∗)+4λn​R(θM⊥∗​)​.

The bound holds for every pair (M,M‾)(\mathcal M,\overline{\mathcal M})(M,M) over which R\mathcal RR decomposes, and for every optimum, not only a distinguished one.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 1 (p. 7): under the dual-norm condition on λn\lambda_nλn​, the error Δ^=θ^λn−θ∗\hat\Delta=\hat\theta_{\lambda_n}-\theta^*Δ^=θ^λn​​−θ∗ lies in C(M,M‾⊥;θ∗)\mathbb C(\mathcal M,\overline{\mathcal M}^\perp;\theta^*)C(M,M⊥;θ∗). This milestone links an existing platform statement of the same lemma (Wainwright, Proposition 9.13).
  2. Section 2.4, p. 10, first display: if θ∗∈M\theta^*\in\mathcal Mθ∗∈M and Δ∈C\Delta\in\mathbb CΔ∈C, then R(Δ)≤4Ψ(M‾)∥Δ∥\mathcal R(\Delta)\le4\Psi(\overline{\mathcal M})\|\Delta\|R(Δ)≤4Ψ(M)∥Δ∥.

Further statements

  • Corollary 1 (p. 11): if θ∗∈M\theta^*\in\mathcal Mθ∗∈M and τL(θ∗)=0\tau_{\mathcal L}(\theta^*)=0τL​(θ∗)=0, then ∥θ^λn−θ∗∥≤3λnΨ(M‾)/κL\|\hat\theta_{\lambda_n}-\theta^*\|\le3\lambda_n\Psi(\overline{\mathcal M})/\kappa_{\mathcal L}∥θ^λn​​−θ∗∥≤3λn​Ψ(M)/κL​ and R(θ^λn−θ∗)≤12λnΨ2(M‾)/κL\mathcal R(\hat\theta_{\lambda_n}-\theta^*)\le12\lambda_n\Psi^2(\overline{\mathcal M})/\kappa_{\mathcal L}R(θ^λn​​−θ∗)≤12λn​Ψ2(M)/κL​.
  • Section 2.4, p. 10, second display: a lower bound δL≥κ1∥Δ∥2−κ2g R2(Δ)\delta\mathcal L\ge\kappa_1\|\Delta\|^2-\kappa_2 g\,\mathcal R^2(\Delta)δL≥κ1​∥Δ∥2−κ2​gR2(Δ) on the unit ball gives curvature κ1−16κ2Ψ2(M‾)g\kappa_1-16\kappa_2\Psi^2(\overline{\mathcal M})gκ1​−16κ2​Ψ2(M)g on C\mathbb CC when θ∗∈M\theta^*\in\mathcal Mθ∗∈M.
  • Example 1 (p. 5) and the value Ψ(M(S))=∣S∣\Psi(\mathcal M(S))=\sqrt{|S|}Ψ(M(S))=∣S∣​ (p. 9): the ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​-norm instance, which shows that the hypotheses of the goal can be met.

Significance

Theorem 1 reduces a consistency proof for a new regularized estimator to two checks: that the regularizer decomposes over a pair of subspaces adapted to the model, and that the loss is curved on the set C\mathbb CC, together with a bound on R∗(∇L(θ∗))\mathcal R^*(\nabla\mathcal L(\theta^*))R∗(∇L(θ∗)) that is usually a concentration inequality. The paper derives from it the slog⁡p/ns\log p/nslogp/n Lasso rate under restricted eigenvalue conditions, rates for weakly sparse (ℓq\ell_qℓq​-ball) vectors, and group-Lasso rates; companion papers use it for low-rank matrix estimation, matrix completion and generalized linear models. Because the bound holds for every pair (M,M‾)(\mathcal M,\overline{\mathcal M})(M,M), it gives an explicit trade-off between an estimation error and an approximation error R(θM⊥∗)\mathcal R(\theta^*_{\mathcal M^\perp})R(θM⊥∗​).

The theorem is proved in the paper's supplementary appendix. No machine-checked proof of it is known. On Prove2Me, Wainwright's textbook restatement (Theorem 9.19, HighDimStat.Decomposability.thm9_19_general_bound) is a related but different statement: its RSC condition is local, on a ball, with a tolerance proportional to R2(Δ)\mathcal R^2(\Delta)R2(Δ), and it has extra side conditions and a different bound. A formal proof of the present goal certifies the deterministic core that every corollary of the paper relies on.

Difficulty

The obvious argument compares the objective at θ^\hat\thetaθ^ and at θ∗\theta^*θ∗ and applies RSC to the error. RSC, however, is available only on the set C\mathbb CC, not on all of EEE: in high dimensions the loss is flat in many directions, so strong convexity fails. The work is to show first that the error lies in C\mathbb CC (Lemma 1, which rests on decomposability and the choice of λn\lambda_nλn​), and then to relate the regularizer to the error norm through the projections onto M‾\overline{\mathcal M}M and M‾⊥\overline{\mathcal M}^\perpM⊥. The distinction between M\mathcal MM and M‾\overline{\mathcal M}M matters throughout: the compatibility constant is taken on the larger space M‾\overline{\mathcal M}M, while the approximation error projects θ∗\theta^*θ∗ onto the complement of the smaller one. The bound comes from a quadratic inequality in ∥Δ^∥\|\hat\Delta\|∥Δ^∥, and the constants depend on how its terms are split.

Formalization scope

Representation. The parameter space is an arbitrary finite-dimensional real inner product space E (equivalently Rp\mathbb R^pRp with any inner product, as the paper allows); matrices are covered by the same abstraction. Subspaces are Submodule ℝ E, projections are Submodule.starProjection, and the gradient is Mathlib's gradient, under the hypothesis that L\mathcal LL is differentiable. The dual norm and Ψ\PsiΨ are real suprema (sSup). They equal the paper's quantities because R\mathcal RR is required to be a genuine norm (nonnegative, definite, absolutely homogeneous, subadditive) and EEE is finite-dimensional; Ψ({0})=0\Psi(\{0\})=0Ψ({0})=0. The tolerance is a real number τ\tauτ entering as τ2\tau^2τ2; RSC contains κ>0\kappa>0κ>0 and is quantified over exactly C(M,M‾⊥;θ∗)\mathbb C(\mathcal M,\overline{\mathcal M}^\perp;\theta^*)C(M,M⊥;θ∗) for the same pair and point as the decomposability. Every statement is for every optimal solution of program (1). The data Z1nZ_1^nZ1n​ are fixed and absorbed into L\mathcal LL, and θ∗\theta^*θ∗ is an arbitrary point: the paper's requirement that θ∗\theta^*θ∗ minimise the population risk is never used by the theorem and is dropped.

Corrections of the printed statements.

  1. Display (22) prints the tolerance term as λnκL⋅2τL2(θ∗)\frac{\lambda_n}{\kappa_{\mathcal L}}\cdot2\tau^2_{\mathcal L}(\theta^*)κL​λn​​⋅2τL2​(θ∗). As printed the statement is false: for E=RE=\mathbb RE=R, R=∣⋅∣\mathcal R=|\cdot|R=∣⋅∣, M=M‾=R\mathcal M=\overline{\mathcal M}=\mathbb RM=M=R, L(θ)=(max⁡(0,∣θ∣−1))2\mathcal L(\theta)=(\max(0,|\theta|-1))^2L(θ)=(max(0,∣θ∣−1))2, θ∗=0.9\theta^*=0.9θ∗=0.9, λn=0.01\lambda_n=0.01λn​=0.01, κL=1/2\kappa_{\mathcal L}=1/2κL​=1/2, τL2=10\tau^2_{\mathcal L}=10τL2​=10, the optimum is 000 and ∥Δ^∥2=0.81\|\hat\Delta\|^2=0.81∥Δ^∥2=0.81 exceeds the printed bound 0.40360.40360.4036. The goal states 2τL2(θ∗)/κL2\tau^2_{\mathcal L}(\theta^*)/\kappa_{\mathcal L}2τL2​(θ∗)/κL​; the two forms agree when τL=0\tau_{\mathcal L}=0τL​=0, and the constants 999 and 444 are the paper's.
  2. Corollary 1's (25a) prints ∥θ^−θ∗∥≤9λn2Ψ2(M‾)/κL\|\hat\theta-\theta^*\|\le9\lambda_n^2\Psi^2(\overline{\mathcal M})/\kappa_{\mathcal L}∥θ^−θ∗∥≤9λn2​Ψ2(M)/κL​, which fails for L(θ)=(θ−0.002)2\mathcal L(\theta)=(\theta-0.002)^2L(θ)=(θ−0.002)2, θ∗=0.001\theta^*=0.001θ∗=0.001, λn=0.004\lambda_n=0.004λn​=0.004 on R\mathbb RR; the mission states 3λnΨ(M‾)/κL3\lambda_n\Psi(\overline{\mathcal M})/\kappa_{\mathcal L}3λn​Ψ(M)/κL​. Its "C(M,M‾,θ∗)\mathbb C(\mathcal M,\overline{\mathcal M},\theta^*)C(M,M,θ∗)" is read as C(M,M‾⊥;θ∗)\mathbb C(\mathcal M,\overline{\mathcal M}^\perp;\theta^*)C(M,M⊥;θ∗).

Trivializations ruled out. A regularizer predicate weaker than a norm would let the real suprema collapse to the junk value 000 and make the λn\lambda_nλn​ condition or the Ψ\PsiΨ term free; RSC over all of EEE would be classical strong convexity, and RSC over the cone without the 4R(θM⊥∗)4\mathcal R(\theta^*_{\mathcal M^\perp})4R(θM⊥∗​) slack would make the goal false; decomposability without M⊆M‾\mathcal M\subseteq\overline{\mathcal M}M⊆M or with the bars misplaced changes the theorem. None of these is used. The ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​ example and a checked one-dimensional instance show that all hypotheses of the goal can hold simultaneously.

Infrastructure and contributions. A complete development needs: Hölder's inequality for a norm and its dual norm, boundedness of the two suprema in finite dimension, the decomposability inequality R(θ∗+Δ)−R(θ∗)≥R(ΔM‾⊥)−R(ΔM‾)−2R(θM⊥∗)\mathcal R(\theta^*+\Delta)-\mathcal R(\theta^*)\ge\mathcal R(\Delta_{\overline{\mathcal M}^\perp})-\mathcal R(\Delta_{\overline{\mathcal M}})-2\mathcal R(\theta^*_{\mathcal M^\perp})R(θ∗+Δ)−R(θ∗)≥R(ΔM⊥​)−R(ΔM​)−2R(θM⊥∗​), the first-order characterization of convexity, and the solution of a scalar quadratic inequality. The dual-norm and compatibility-constant lemmas are reusable for every decomposable-regularizer mission. Proofs of the milestones, of the goal, and of the ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​ instance are all welcome.

Selected references

  • S. N. Negahban, P. Ravikumar, M. J. Wainwright, B. Yu, A Unified Framework for High-Dimensional Analysis of M-Estimators with Decomposable Regularizers, Statistical Science 27(4), 2012, 538–557. arXiv:1010.2731v3, doi:10.1214/12-STS400
  • P. J. Bickel, Y. Ritov, A. B. Tsybakov, Simultaneous Analysis of Lasso and Dantzig Selector, Annals of Statistics 37(4), 2009, 1705–1732. arXiv:0801.1095
  • M. J. Wainwright, High-Dimensional Statistics: A Non-Asymptotic Viewpoint, Cambridge University Press, 2019, Chapter 9. doi:10.1017/9781108627771
5 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Functional AnalysisOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Proximité et dualité dans un espace hilbertien II: Proximal Maps Are the Nonexpansive Subgradient Selections of Convex FunctionsResearch Paper

Motivation

The proximal map of a convex function is the basic building block of proximal-point, forward–backward, Douglas–Rachford and ADMM methods, which are used throughout large-scale convex optimization, signal processing and operator splitting. All of these methods treat prox⁡g\operatorname{prox}_gproxg​ as a nonexpansive operator and use the fact that it is a gradient. The questions this mission formalizes go back to the paper that introduced the map: J.-J. Moreau, Proximité et dualité dans un espace hilbertien, Bull. Soc. Math. France 93 (1965), 273–299 (DOI 10.24033/bsmf.1625). Which maps p:H→Hp : H \to Hp:H→H are proximal maps, and how can a function be recognized as the "potential" of one?

Moreau's answer (Corollaire 10.c) is intrinsic. A map is a proximal map exactly when it is nonexpansive and selects, at every point, a subgradient of some convex function. This characterization is the Hilbert-space origin of later results on firmly nonexpansive operators and on resolvents of maximal monotone operators (Minty 1962; Rockafellar 1970). It is still how one checks that a given nonexpansive operator is a proximal map.

Setting

Throughout, HHH is a real Hilbert space with inner product (x∣y)(x \mid y)(x∣y) and norm ∥x∥\|x\|∥x∥.

  • Γ0(H)\Gamma_0(H)Γ0​(H) is the class of functions f:H→ ]−∞,+∞]f : H \to \,]-\infty, +\infty]f:H→]−∞,+∞] that are convex (convex epigraph), lower semicontinuous and not identically +∞+\infty+∞.
  • The dual function of fff is g(y)=sup⁡x∈H[(x∣y)−f(x)]g(y) = \sup_{x \in H}[(x \mid y) - f(x)]g(y)=supx∈H​[(x∣y)−f(x)]. For f∈Γ0(H)f \in \Gamma_0(H)f∈Γ0​(H), g∈Γ0(H)g \in \Gamma_0(H)g∈Γ0​(H) and fff is the dual of ggg.
  • A vector yyy is a subgradient of φ\varphiφ at zzz, written y∈∂φ(z)y \in \partial\varphi(z)y∈∂φ(z), when φ(z)\varphi(z)φ(z) is finite and φ(z)+(u−z∣y)≤φ(u)\varphi(z) + (u - z \mid y) \le \varphi(u)φ(z)+(u−z∣y)≤φ(u) for all uuu. For f∈Γ0(H)f \in \Gamma_0(H)f∈Γ0​(H) this is the paper's condition f(z)+g(y)=(z∣y)f(z) + g(y) = (z \mid y)f(z)+g(y)=(z∣y), i.e. zzz and yyy are conjugate points.
  • For f∈Γ0(H)f \in \Gamma_0(H)f∈Γ0​(H) and z∈Hz \in Hz∈H, the function u↦12∥u−z∥2+f(u)u \mapsto \tfrac12\|u - z\|^2 + f(u)u↦21​∥u−z∥2+f(u) has a unique minimizer, the proximal point prox⁡fz\operatorname{prox}_f zproxf​z. A map p:H→Hp : H \to Hp:H→H is a prox map when p=prox⁡gp = \operatorname{prox}_gp=proxg​ for some g∈Γ0(H)g \in \Gamma_0(H)g∈Γ0​(H).
  • A multivalued map z↦Pz⊆Hz \mapsto Pz \subseteq Hz↦Pz⊆H contracts distances when x∈Pzx \in Pzx∈Pz, x′∈Pz′x' \in Pz'x′∈Pz′ imply ∥x−x′∥≤∥z−z′∥\|x - x'\| \le \|z - z'\|∥x−x′∥≤∥z−z′∥.
  • For dual functions f,gf, gf,g, the primitive of prox⁡g\operatorname{prox}_gproxg​ is φ(z)=12∥prox⁡gz∥2+f(prox⁡fz)\varphi(z) = \tfrac12\|\operatorname{prox}_g z\|^2 + f(\operatorname{prox}_f z)φ(z)=21​∥proxg​z∥2+f(proxf​z). With Q(z)=12∥z∥2\mathcal{Q}(z) = \tfrac12\|z\|^2Q(z)=21​∥z∥2, a function φ\varphiφ is less convex than Q\mathcal{Q}Q when φ+γ=Q\varphi + \gamma = \mathcal{Q}φ+γ=Q for a convex γ\gammaγ, and θ\thetaθ is more convex than Q\mathcal{Q}Q when θ=Q+γ\theta = \mathcal{Q} + \gammaθ=Q+γ for a convex γ\gammaγ with values in ]−∞,+∞]]-\infty, +\infty]]−∞,+∞].

The Lean names are GammaZero, conj, subgrad, IsProx, prox, IsProxMap, ContractsDistances, primitive, LessConvexThanQ, MoreConvexThanQ and IsProxPrimitive, all in the namespace MoreauProx.Characterization.

Formalization targets

Goal: Corollaire 10.c

For every map p:H→Hp : H \to Hp:H→H,

p is a prox map  ⟺  (∥p(z)−p(z′)∥≤∥z−z′∥  ∀z,z′) ∧ ∃φ convex, ∀z∈H, p(z)∈∂φ(z).p \text{ is a prox map} \iff \Big(\|p(z) - p(z')\| \le \|z - z'\| \ \ \forall z, z'\Big) \ \wedge\ \exists \varphi \text{ convex},\ \forall z \in H,\ p(z) \in \partial\varphi(z).p is a prox map⟺(∥p(z)−p(z′)∥≤∥z−z′∥  ∀z,z′) ∧ ∃φ convex, ∀z∈H, p(z)∈∂φ(z).

Nothing is assumed of φ\varphiφ beyond convexity.

Milestones, in the order of the paper

  1. Proposition 3.a. For f∈Γ0(H)f \in \Gamma_0(H)f∈Γ0​(H), u↦12∥u−z∥2+f(u)u \mapsto \tfrac12\|u - z\|^2 + f(u)u↦21​∥u−z∥2+f(u) has a strict minimum.
  2. Proposition 4.a (Moreau decomposition). For f∈Γ0(H)f \in \Gamma_0(H)f∈Γ0​(H) with dual ggg: z=x+yz = x + yz=x+y and f(x)+g(y)=(x∣y)f(x) + g(y) = (x \mid y)f(x)+g(y)=(x∣y) if and only if x=prox⁡fzx = \operatorname{prox}_f zx=proxf​z and y=prox⁡gzy = \operatorname{prox}_g zy=proxg​z.
  3. (5.1). Conjugate pairs are monotone: (x−x′∣y−y′)≥0(x - x' \mid y - y') \ge 0(x−x′∣y−y′)≥0.
  4. Proposition 5.b. ∥prox⁡fz−prox⁡fz′∥≤∥z−z′∥\|\operatorname{prox}_f z - \operatorname{prox}_f z'\| \le \|z - z'\|∥proxf​z−proxf​z′∥≤∥z−z′∥, so prox⁡f\operatorname{prox}_fproxf​ is continuous.
  5. Proposition 7.b. The primitive φ\varphiφ of prox⁡g\operatorname{prox}_gproxg​ lies in Γ0(H)\Gamma_0(H)Γ0​(H), and its dual is g+12∥⋅∥2g + \tfrac12\|\cdot\|^2g+21​∥⋅∥2.
  6. Proposition 7.d. φ\varphiφ is Fréchet differentiable with ∇φ(z)=prox⁡gz\nabla\varphi(z) = \operatorname{prox}_g z∇φ(z)=proxg​z.
  7. Proposition 9.b. For φ\varphiφ: (φ∈Γ0(H)\varphi \in \Gamma_0(H)φ∈Γ0​(H) less convex than Q\mathcal{Q}Q)   ⟺  \iff⟺ (φ∈Γ0(H)\varphi \in \Gamma_0(H)φ∈Γ0​(H) with dual more convex than Q\mathcal{Q}Q)   ⟺  \iff⟺ (φ\varphiφ is the primitive of a prox map).
  8. Proposition 10.b. Each of these is equivalent to: φ∈Γ0(H)\varphi \in \Gamma_0(H)φ∈Γ0​(H) and z↦∂φ(z)z \mapsto \partial\varphi(z)z↦∂φ(z) contracts distances.

Three further results of the paper are included as unmilestoned companions: Proposition 8.a (prox⁡g=prox⁡g′\operatorname{prox}_g = \operatorname{prox}_{g'}proxg​=proxg′​ implies g′=g+Kg' = g + Kg′=g+K), Proposition 9.a (Q\mathcal{Q}Q is the only function equal to its dual) and Proposition 9.d (nonnegative combinations ∑αipi\sum \alpha_i p_i∑αi​pi​ of prox maps with ∑αi≤1\sum \alpha_i \le 1∑αi​≤1 are prox maps).

Significance

The result. Corollary 10.c turns "is a prox map" into two checkable properties of ppp, one metric and one variational, with no need to exhibit ggg. Proposition 9.d is one consequence: closure of prox maps under subconvex combinations. Proposition 10.b gives the dual picture, which recognizes primitives of prox maps among the functions of Γ0(H)\Gamma_0(H)Γ0​(H) by a Lipschitz condition on their subdifferential. The intermediate results are the standard toolkit of proximal analysis. They include the Moreau decomposition, the nonexpansiveness of prox⁡f\operatorname{prox}_fproxf​, and the smoothness of the Moreau envelope φ(z)=inf⁡u[12∥u−z∥2+f(u)]\varphi(z) = \inf_u[\tfrac12\|u - z\|^2 + f(u)]φ(z)=infu​[21​∥u−z∥2+f(u)] (Remark 7.c) with gradient z−prox⁡fz=prox⁡gzz - \operatorname{prox}_f z = \operatorname{prox}_g zz−proxf​z=proxg​z.

Formalizing it. All statements were proved in 1965 and are textbook material (Bauschke–Combettes, Convex Analysis and Monotone Operator Theory in Hilbert Spaces, 2nd ed., 2017, Ch. 12–14 and 24). None of them has a machine-checked proof in Mathlib, which has no Γ0(H)\Gamma_0(H)Γ0​(H) class, no extended-valued Fenchel conjugate and no proximal map on a Hilbert space. A complete development here would give reusable infrastructure: the conjugate of extended-valued functions with the Fenchel–Moreau theorem, the proximal map and its nonexpansiveness, and the differentiability of the Moreau envelope. Downstream convergence proofs of proximal algorithms need this layer.

Difficulty

The necessity half of 10.c follows quickly from 5.b and 7.d once those are available. The sufficiency half is the hard one. Given only a nonexpansive ppp and a convex φ\varphiφ with p(z)∈∂φ(z)p(z) \in \partial\varphi(z)p(z)∈∂φ(z), one must produce g∈Γ0(H)g \in \Gamma_0(H)g∈Γ0​(H) with p=prox⁡gp = \operatorname{prox}_gp=proxg​. The obvious move is to take ggg to be something built from φ\varphiφ directly. This fails because the candidate is only defined through a duality that needs φ∈Γ0(H)\varphi \in \Gamma_0(H)φ∈Γ0​(H) and a precise convexity comparison with Q\mathcal{Q}Q. Neither is given, and neither follows from a pointwise argument. The intermediate milestones involve biconjugation of extended-valued functions, upper envelopes of affine functions in infinite dimension, and lower semicontinuity of functions taking +∞+\infty+∞. These are the places where finite-dimensional or finite-valued shortcuts do not apply.

Formalization scope

Conventions committed to in Lean:

  • HHH is [NormedAddCommGroup H] [InnerProductSpace ℝ H] [CompleteSpace H]. Functions with values in ]−∞,+∞]]-\infty, +\infty]]−∞,+∞] are H → EReal.
  • Γ0(H)\Gamma_0(H)Γ0​(H): never −∞-\infty−∞, somewhere finite, convex epigraph in H×RH \times \mathbb{R}H×R, lower semicontinuous in the norm topology. The paper defines Γ0(H)\Gamma_0(H)Γ0​(H) via upper envelopes of continuous affine functions and states this equivalent description on the same page.
  • The dual function is ⨆ x, (⟪x, y⟫ : EReal) - f x, computed in EReal (a complete lattice).
  • Subgradients use the affine-minorant form, which requires φ(z)\varphi(z)φ(z) finite. It agrees with the paper's (2.4) on Γ0(H)\Gamma_0(H)Γ0​(H) and is meaningful for the merely convex φ\varphiφ of the goal.
  • IsProx f z x says that xxx minimizes 12∥u−z∥2+f(u)\tfrac12\|u - z\|^2 + f(u)21​∥u−z∥2+f(u). The function prox f picks such a minimizer by choice (junk value 000 if none exists). Every theorem using prox assumes f∈Γ0(H)f \in \Gamma_0(H)f∈Γ0​(H). A prox map is ∃ g, GammaZero g ∧ ∀ z, IsProx g z (p z).
  • The primitive is real-valued and built from the pair (f,g)(f, g)(f,g) as in Définition 7.a. Theorems about it assume f∈Γ0(H)f \in \Gamma_0(H)f∈Γ0​(H) and ggg equal to the dual of fff (the paper's "duales l'une de l'autre", which this implies).
  • In the goal, φ\varphiφ is taken real-valued and convex (ConvexOn ℝ Set.univ). This is equivalent to the paper's ]−∞,+∞]]-\infty, +\infty]]−∞,+∞]-valued φ\varphiφ, because a subgradient at every point forces φ\varphiφ finite everywhere. The contraction condition is §10.a applied to z↦{p(z)}z \mapsto \{p(z)\}z↦{p(z)}.
  • In 9.b and 10.b the auxiliary convex γ\gammaγ may take +∞+\infty+∞. Property (III) does not assume φ∈Γ0(H)\varphi \in \Gamma_0(H)φ∈Γ0​(H).

Trivializing formalizations are ruled out. The goal's φ\varphiφ is required to be convex and to have p(z)p(z)p(z) as a genuine subgradient at every point, with φ(z)\varphi(z)φ(z) finite. Γ0(H)\Gamma_0(H)Γ0​(H) excludes the constant +∞+\infty+∞, under which every point would minimize the proximal objective. No theorem applies prox outside Γ0(H)\Gamma_0(H)Γ0​(H), where its junk value would make statements vacuous.

Needed infrastructure: Fenchel–Moreau biconjugation for EReal-valued functions on a Hilbert space, existence of minimizers of coercive lsc convex functions (weak compactness of balls), and a Fréchet-derivative argument for the envelope. Contributions are welcome at every milestone. Also welcome are helper lemmas on EReal arithmetic for convex functions, and alternative proofs of 10.c via Minty's theorem on firmly nonexpansive maps.

Selected references

  • J.-J. Moreau, Proximité et dualité dans un espace hilbertien, Bull. Soc. Math. France 93 (1965), 273–299. https://doi.org/10.24033/bsmf.1625
  • J.-J. Moreau, Fonctions convexes duales et points proximaux dans un espace hilbertien, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris 255 (1962), 2897–2899.
  • G. J. Minty, Monotone (nonlinear) operators in Hilbert space, Duke Math. J. 29 (1962), 341–346. https://doi.org/10.1215/S0012-7094-62-02933-2
  • R. T. Rockafellar, On the maximal monotonicity of subdifferential mappings, Pacific J. Math. 33 (1970), 209–216. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1970.33.209
  • H. H. Bauschke and P. L. Combettes, Convex Analysis and Monotone Operator Theory in Hilbert Spaces, 2nd ed., Springer, 2017. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-319-48311-5
12 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Functional AnalysisOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Proximité et dualité dans un espace hilbertien I: Moreau's Decomposition into Proximal Points of a Function and Its DualResearch Paper

Motivation

Proximal maps are the basic building block of first-order methods for nonsmooth convex optimization: the proximal point algorithm, forward–backward splitting (ISTA/FISTA), Douglas–Rachford splitting and ADMM all proceed by evaluating maps of the form z↦argmin⁡u[12∥u−z∥2+f(u)]z \mapsto \operatorname{argmin}_u \big[\tfrac12\|u - z\|^2 + f(u)\big]z↦argminu​[21​∥u−z∥2+f(u)]. The notion and its name come from J.-J. Moreau, who introduced proximal points in two 1962 notes in the Comptes rendus and gave the systematic theory in Proximité et dualité dans un espace hilbertien (Bull. Soc. Math. France 93 (1965), 273–299).

The central result of that paper, which Moreau calls the key proposition, links proximal maps to conjugate duality: every point of a Hilbert space splits uniquely into the proximal point of zzz relative to a convex function plus the proximal point relative to its dual function. The identity z=proxfz+proxf∗zz = \mathrm{prox}_f z + \mathrm{prox}_{f^*} zz=proxf​z+proxf∗​z is used throughout modern optimization, for example to compute the proximal map of a norm from the projection onto the dual-norm ball, and in the analysis of primal–dual splitting methods.

Timeline. Moreau (1962) announces proximal points and the decomposition along mutually polar cones. Moreau (1965) proves the general decomposition theorem for Γ0(H)\Gamma_0(H)Γ0​(H) and derives from it the characterization of proximal maps and the maximal monotonicity of subdifferentials in Hilbert space. Rockafellar (Pacific J. Math. 33 (1970)) extends maximal monotonicity of subdifferentials to Banach spaces.

Setting

Let HHH be a real Hilbert space with inner product (x∣y)(x \mid y)(x∣y) and norm ∥x∥\|x\|∥x∥. Functions take values in the extended real line [−∞,+∞][-\infty, +\infty][−∞,+∞].

The class Γ0(H)\Gamma_0(H)Γ0​(H) consists of the functions f:H→ ]−∞,+∞]f : H \to\ ]-\infty, +\infty]f:H→ ]−∞,+∞] that are convex (their epigraph {(x,r):f(x)≤r}\{(x, r) : f(x) \le r\}{(x,r):f(x)≤r} is convex in H×RH \times \mathbb RH×R), lower semicontinuous, and not identically +∞+\infty+∞.

The dual function of fff is

f∗(y)=sup⁡x∈H [(x∣y)−f(x)].f^{*}(y) = \sup_{x \in H}\,\big[(x \mid y) - f(x)\big].f∗(y)=x∈Hsup​[(x∣y)−f(x)].

Two points xxx and yyy are conjugate with respect to fff and g=f∗g = f^*g=f∗ when f(x)+g(y)=(x∣y)f(x) + g(y) = (x \mid y)f(x)+g(y)=(x∣y); the set of such yyy is the subdifferential ∂f(x)\partial f(x)∂f(x).

For f∈Γ0(H)f \in \Gamma_0(H)f∈Γ0​(H) and z∈Hz \in Hz∈H, the proximal point proxfz\mathrm{prox}_f zproxf​z is the unique minimizer of

Φ(u)=12∥u−z∥2+f(u).\Phi(u) = \tfrac12\|u - z\|^2 + f(u).Φ(u)=21​∥u−z∥2+f(u).

When fff is the indicator function of a nonempty closed convex set CCC (zero on CCC, +∞+\infty+∞ outside), proxfz\mathrm{prox}_f zproxf​z is the nearest-point projection projCz\mathrm{proj}_C zprojC​z.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 4.a (Moreau's decomposition)

Let f∈Γ0(H)f \in \Gamma_0(H)f∈Γ0​(H) and g=f∗g = f^*g=f∗. For all x,y,z∈Hx, y, z \in Hx,y,z∈H,

(z=x+y  and  f(x)+g(y)=(x∣y))  ⟺  (x=proxfz  and  y=proxgz).\Big(z = x + y \ \text{ and } \ f(x) + g(y) = (x \mid y)\Big) \iff \Big(x = \mathrm{prox}_f z \ \text{ and } \ y = \mathrm{prox}_g z\Big).(z=x+y  and  f(x)+g(y)=(x∣y))⟺(x=proxf​z  and  y=proxg​z).

Milestones

  1. (2.3), the Fenchel–Young inequality: f(x)+f∗(y)≥(x∣y)f(x) + f^*(y) \ge (x \mid y)f(x)+f∗(y)≥(x∣y) for all x,yx, yx,y.
  2. §2.b, biconjugation: f∗∈Γ0(H)f^* \in \Gamma_0(H)f∗∈Γ0​(H) and f∗∗=ff^{**} = ff∗∗=f for f∈Γ0(H)f \in \Gamma_0(H)f∈Γ0​(H).
  3. Proposition 3.a: Φ(u)=12∥u−z∥2+f(u)\Phi(u) = \tfrac12\|u - z\|^2 + f(u)Φ(u)=21​∥u−z∥2+f(u) has a strict minimum, so proxfz\mathrm{prox}_f zproxf​z is well defined.

Companions

  • Corollaire 4.b: for a closed convex cone PPP and its polar cone Q={y:(x∣y)≤0 ∀x∈P}Q = \{y : (x \mid y) \le 0\ \forall x \in P\}Q={y:(x∣y)≤0 ∀x∈P}, z=x+yz = x + yz=x+y with x∈Px \in Px∈P, y∈Qy \in Qy∈Q, (x∣y)=0(x \mid y) = 0(x∣y)=0 iff x=projPzx = \mathrm{proj}_P zx=projP​z and y=projQzy = \mathrm{proj}_Q zy=projQ​z.
  • (5.1): the conjugacy relation is monotone, (x−x′∣y−y′)≥0(x - x' \mid y - y') \ge 0(x−x′∣y−y′)≥0.
  • Proposition 12.b: the relation y∈∂f(x)y \in \partial f(x)y∈∂f(x) is maximal monotone.

Significance

The decomposition theorem gives, for every zzz, a unique splitting into a pair of conjugate points, and conversely identifies every conjugate pair summing to zzz with the two proximal points. Special cases are the orthogonal decomposition along a closed subspace and its complement, and the decomposition along a pair of mutually polar cones (Corollaire 4.b). In the rest of Moreau's paper it yields that proximal maps are nonexpansive, that the Moreau envelopes of fff and f∗f^*f∗ add up to 12∥z∥2\tfrac12\|z\|^221​∥z∥2, and that the subdifferential of a function in Γ0(H)\Gamma_0(H)Γ0​(H) is maximal monotone (Proposition 12.b). In algorithms it lets one evaluate proxf∗\mathrm{prox}_{f^*}proxf∗​ from proxf\mathrm{prox}_fproxf​ at no extra cost, which is the basis of dual and primal–dual proximal methods.

All results in this mission are classical and proved (Moreau 1965; see also Bauschke–Combettes, Convex Analysis and Monotone Operator Theory in Hilbert Spaces, 2nd ed., 2017, Thm. 14.3). What the mission adds is a machine-checked development. Mathlib contains convex functions, lower semicontinuity and Hilbert-space projections onto closed convex sets, but as of this mission's environment it has no Legendre–Fenchel conjugate for extended-valued functions on a Hilbert space, no proximal map and no maximal monotone operators. The Hilbert projection theorem is on the platform as FamousTheorems.hilbert_projection_theorem; it is the special case of Proposition 3.a for indicator functions.

Difficulty

The two directions of the goal are unequal. That conjugate points summing to zzz are the two proximal points needs only the definition of the dual function. The converse must produce the conjugacy identity f(x)+f∗(z−x)=(x∣z−x)f(x) + f^*(z - x) = (x \mid z - x)f(x)+f∗(z−x)=(x∣z−x) from the bare fact that xxx minimizes 12∥u−z∥2+f(u)\tfrac12\|u - z\|^2 + f(u)21​∥u−z∥2+f(u), and a pointwise first-order argument is unavailable because fff need be neither finite nor differentiable anywhere.

The milestones carry the analytic weight. Proposition 3.a needs existence of a minimizer of a function that is neither continuous nor coercive by itself on an infinite-dimensional space, so compactness arguments in the norm topology fail. Biconjugation (§2.b) is the Fenchel–Moreau theorem, which requires a separation theorem in H×RH \times \mathbb RH×R applied to a closed convex epigraph whose values may be +∞+\infty+∞.

Formalization scope

Everything lives in the namespace MoreauProx.Decomposition, over {H : Type*} [NormedAddCommGroup H] [InnerProductSpace ℝ H] [CompleteSpace H]; the paper's (x∣y)(x \mid y)(x∣y) is ⟪x, y⟫_ℝ. The following conventions are committed to:

  • Functions are H → EReal. Γ0(H)\Gamma_0(H)Γ0​(H) (GammaZero) is the structure: never ⊥, not everywhere ⊤, convex epigraph in H × ℝ, and LowerSemicontinuous in the norm topology. The paper defines Γ0(H)\Gamma_0(H)Γ0​(H) as suprema of nonempty families of continuous affine functions, other than +∞+\infty+∞, and states the equivalence with this description (§2.a); the second description is the one formalized. Weak and strong lower semicontinuity agree for convex functions, as the paper remarks, so no weak topology appears.
  • The dual function is conj f y = ⨆ x, ⟪x, y⟫_ℝ - f x in EReal; since a - ⊤ = ⊥, this matches both lines of (2.2).
  • "x=proxfzx = \mathrm{prox}_f zx=proxf​z" is the predicate IsProx f z x: xxx minimizes proxObjective f z u = ‖u - z‖ ^ 2 / 2 + f u. With Proposition 3.a it is equivalent to the paper's notation; no choice function is used.
  • The goal assumes GammaZero f and g = conj f; the paper's "f,g∈Γ0(H)f, g \in \Gamma_0(H)f,g∈Γ0​(H) dual to each other" follows from this by §2.b, so the goal is not weaker than the paper's.
  • The polar cone uses ≤0\le 0≤0 (the negative of Mathlib's innerDual), and projCz\mathrm{proj}_C zprojC​z is the predicate IsProj C z x (nearest point).
  • Maximal monotonicity is the paper's definition: monotone, and contained in no strictly larger monotone relation.

A formalization that drops the requirement that fff be not identically +∞+\infty+∞, drops the factor 12\tfrac1221​, replaces the duality hypothesis by unrelated f,gf, gf,g, or reads values through EReal.toReal would make the statement false or vacuous; the definitions above rule these out.

Contributions welcome: proofs of the three milestones and of the goal; reusable infrastructure for extended-valued convex analysis on Hilbert spaces (conjugates, subdifferentials, proximal maps), which the companion mission Proximité et dualité dans un espace hilbertien II builds on.

Selected references

  • J.-J. Moreau, Proximité et dualité dans un espace hilbertien, Bull. Soc. Math. France 93 (1965), 273–299. https://doi.org/10.24033/bsmf.1625
  • J.-J. Moreau, Fonctions convexes duales et points proximaux dans un espace hilbertien, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris 255 (1962), 2897–2899.
  • R. T. Rockafellar, On the maximal monotonicity of subdifferential mappings, Pacific J. Math. 33 (1970), 209–216. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1970.33.209
  • H. H. Bauschke and P. L. Combettes, Convex Analysis and Monotone Operator Theory in Hilbert Spaces, 2nd ed., Springer, 2017. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-319-48311-5
7 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Linear algebraOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Robust Solutions to Uncertain Semidefinite Programs III: Quadratic Growth and Uniqueness of the Robust SDP SolutionResearch Paper

Motivation

A semidefinite program (SDP) minimizes a linear objective cTxc^TxcTx subject to a linear matrix inequality F(x)=F0+∑ixiFi⪰0F(x) = F_0 + \sum_i x_i F_i \succeq 0F(x)=F0​+∑i​xi​Fi​⪰0. When the data FiF_iFi​ are uncertain, El Ghaoui, Oustry and Lebret (SIAM J. Optim. 9(1), 1998) proposed to optimize against the worst case over a norm-bounded family of perturbations: the robust SDP. Their Theorem 3.1 shows that, for unstructured ("full") perturbations, the robust SDP is itself an SDP in the enlarged variable (x,τ)(x,\tau)(x,τ). Section 4 of the paper then asks what robustification does to the solution. Nominal SDPs are often ill-posed: the optimal set can be a whole face, and optimal points can jump under small data changes. Section 4 shows that, under explicit hypotheses, the robust problem has a unique solution with quadratic growth, which is the sense in which the paper describes robustness as a regularization of SDPs. This mission formalizes that result, Theorem 4.2.

Setting

Fix natural numbers m,n,p,qm, n, p, qm,n,p,q, matrices F0,…,Fm∈Rn×nF_0, \dots, F_m \in \mathbb{R}^{n\times n}F0​,…,Fm​∈Rn×n (symmetric), R0,…,Rm∈Rq×nR_0, \dots, R_m \in \mathbb{R}^{q\times n}R0​,…,Rm​∈Rq×n, L∈Rn×pL \in \mathbb{R}^{n\times p}L∈Rn×p, and an objective vector c∈Rmc \in \mathbb{R}^mc∈Rm, c≠0c \neq 0c=0. Write F(x)=F0+∑i=1mxiFiF(x) = F_0 + \sum_{i=1}^m x_iF_iF(x)=F0​+∑i=1m​xi​Fi​ and R(x)=R0+∑i=1mxiRiR(x) = R_0 + \sum_{i=1}^m x_iR_iR(x)=R0​+∑i=1m​xi​Ri​.

With full perturbations, uncertainty level ρ=1\rho = 1ρ=1 and D=0D = 0D=0 (the standing choices of §4), the robust SDP is the SDP

minimize cTxsubject toF(x,τ)=[F(x)−τLLTR(x)TR(x)τI]⪰0(15)\text{minimize } c^Tx \quad\text{subject to}\quad \mathcal{F}(x,\tau) = \begin{bmatrix} F(x) - \tau LL^T & R(x)^T \\ R(x) & \tau I\end{bmatrix} \succeq 0 \tag{15}minimize cTxsubject toF(x,τ)=[F(x)−τLLTR(x)​R(x)TτI​]⪰0(15)

in the variables y=(x,τ)∈Rm×Ry = (x,\tau) \in \mathbb{R}^m \times \mathbb{R}y=(x,τ)∈Rm×R. A point is feasible if F(x,τ)⪰0\mathcal{F}(x,\tau) \succeq 0F(x,τ)⪰0 (symmetric positive semidefinite) and optimal if it is feasible and minimizes cTxc^TxcTx over all feasible (x′,τ′)(x',\tau')(x′,τ′). The solution is the pair (x,τ)(x,\tau)(x,τ).

The paper's hypotheses (§4.1):

  • H1 (Slater): F(x,τ)≻0\mathcal{F}(x,\tau) \succ 0F(x,τ)≻0 for some (x,τ)(x,\tau)(x,τ).
  • H2 (inf-compactness): every sublevel set {(x,τ) feasible:cTx≤M}\{(x,\tau)\ \text{feasible} : c^Tx \le M\}{(x,τ) feasible:cTx≤M} is bounded.
  • H3(a): the nullspace of the pencil λR0+∑ixiRi\lambda R_0 + \sum_i x_iR_iλR0​+∑i​xi​Ri​ is one and the same proper subspace N⊊RnN \subsetneq \mathbb{R}^nN⊊Rn for every (λ,x)≠(0,0)(\lambda,x) \neq (0,0)(λ,x)=(0,0).
  • H3(b): for every xxx the stacked matrix [LTR(x)]\begin{bmatrix} L^T \\ R(x)\end{bmatrix}[LTR(x)​] has full column rank.

For τ>0\tau > 0τ>0 put G(x,τ)=F(x)−τLLT−1τR(x)TR(x)G(x,\tau) = F(x) - \tau LL^T - \frac{1}{\tau}R(x)^TR(x)G(x,τ)=F(x)−τLLT−τ1​R(x)TR(x), the Schur complement of the block τI\tau IτI in F(x,τ)\mathcal{F}(x,\tau)F(x,τ).

The quadratic growth condition (QGC) holds at an optimal point y⋆=(x⋆,τ⋆)y^\star = (x^\star,\tau^\star)y⋆=(x⋆,τ⋆) if there are α,ε>0\alpha, \varepsilon > 0α,ε>0 with

cTx ≥ cTx⋆+α ∥y−y⋆∥2for every feasible y=(x,τ), ∥y−y⋆∥<ε.c^Tx \ \ge\ c^Tx^\star + \alpha\,\|y - y^\star\|^2 \qquad \text{for every feasible } y = (x,\tau),\ \|y - y^\star\| < \varepsilon .cTx ≥ cTx⋆+α∥y−y⋆∥2for every feasible y=(x,τ), ∥y−y⋆∥<ε.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.2 (p. 39)

Under c≠0c \neq 0c=0, symmetry of the FiF_iFi​, H1, H2, H3(a) and H3(b):

(∀ y⋆ optimal for (15): QGC holds at y⋆)and∃! y=(x,τ) optimal for (15).\bigl(\forall\, y^\star \text{ optimal for (15)}:\ \text{QGC holds at } y^\star\bigr)\quad\text{and}\quad \exists!\, y = (x,\tau) \text{ optimal for (15)} .(∀y⋆ optimal for (15): QGC holds at y⋆)and∃!y=(x,τ) optimal for (15).

Both halves are stated; uniqueness is of the pair (x,τ)(x,\tau)(x,τ), and existence is part of the claim.

Milestones, in the order the paper's proof uses them

  1. §4.1 (p. 38): H3(a) implies R(x)≠0R(x) \neq 0R(x)=0 for every xxx.
  2. §4.2 (p. 39): under H3(a), every feasible τ\tauτ is positive; in particular τopt>0\tau_{\mathrm{opt}} > 0τopt​>0.
  3. §4.2, Eq. (16): for τ>0\tau > 0τ>0, F(x,τ)⪰0  ⟺  G(x,τ)⪰0\mathcal{F}(x,\tau) \succeq 0 \iff G(x,\tau) \succeq 0F(x,τ)⪰0⟺G(x,τ)⪰0.
  4. Appendix A (p. 49): at every optimal (x,τ)(x,\tau)(x,τ) there is a dual matrix Z⪰0Z \succeq 0Z⪰0, Z≠0Z \neq 0Z=0, with Tr⁡ZG(x,τ)=0\operatorname{Tr} ZG(x,\tau) = 0TrZG(x,τ)=0, Tr⁡Z ∂G/∂xi=ci\operatorname{Tr} Z\,\partial G/\partial x_i = c_iTrZ∂G/∂xi​=ci​ and τ2Tr⁡LLTZ=Tr⁡R(x)TR(x)Z\tau^2\operatorname{Tr}LL^TZ = \operatorname{Tr}R(x)^TR(x)Zτ2TrLLTZ=TrR(x)TR(x)Z.
  5. Appendix A (p. 49): H3(b) rules out Tr⁡LLTZ=Tr⁡R(x)TR(x)Z=0\operatorname{Tr}LL^TZ = \operatorname{Tr}R(x)^TR(x)Z = 0TrLLTZ=TrR(x)TR(x)Z=0 for Z⪰0Z \succeq 0Z⪰0, Z≠0Z \neq 0Z=0, hence Tr⁡R(x)TR(x)Z>0\operatorname{Tr}R(x)^TR(x)Z > 0TrR(x)TR(x)Z>0.
  6. Appendix A (pp. 49–50): under H3(a), with τ>0\tau > 0τ>0, Z⪰0Z \succeq 0Z⪰0 and Tr⁡R(x)TR(x)Z>0\operatorname{Tr}R(x)^TR(x)Z > 0TrR(x)TR(x)Z>0, the Hessian of the Lagrangian cTx−Tr⁡Z G(x,τ)c^Tx - \operatorname{Tr} Z\,G(x,\tau)cTx−TrZG(x,τ) is positive definite.

Significance

The result. Theorem 4.2 turns the robust SDP into a well-posed problem: a unique solution with quadratic growth. Quadratic growth is the property from which the paper's Hölder-stability results (Theorem 4.3, Corollaries 4.1–4.2) follow through the perturbation theory of Bonnans, Cominetti and Shapiro, and it is what justifies using the robust SDP as a regularization of ill-conditioned SDPs (§5.4). The remark after the theorem notes a geometric reading: the growth holds for every objective, so the boundary of the robust feasible set contains no facets.

Formalizing it. The theorem has a published proof (Appendix A), which relies on a second-order sufficient condition for nonlinear SDPs cited from Bonnans, Cominetti and Shapiro. There is no machine-checked proof of it or of any second-order optimality result for SDPs that we know of. A formalization provides a complete account of the dual attainment, complementarity and second-order steps for this concrete problem class, and it checks the paper's computations; one of them, the intermediate display for the second derivative in Appendix A, has a factor error in its cross term that does not affect the conclusion.

Difficulty

The feasible set of (15) is a spectrahedron, and linear objectives over spectrahedra do not in general have unique minimizers, since optimal faces can be flat. Uniqueness therefore cannot come from convexity alone. It has to come from curvature of the boundary at the optimum, and that curvature is carried only by the nonlinear term 1τR(x)TR(x)\frac{1}{\tau}R(x)^TR(x)τ1​R(x)TR(x) of the Schur complement, which is degenerate along some directions. Positive definiteness of the Hessian must be recovered from the structural hypotheses H3(a) and H3(b), which interact with a dual matrix ZZZ that is known only to exist. The natural first attempt is to use τ>0\tau > 0τ>0 and the positive semidefiniteness of ZZZ directly. That attempt fails: the second derivative is Tr⁡Z RTR\operatorname{Tr} Z\,\mathcal{R}^T\mathcal{R}TrZRTR for a direction-dependent matrix R\mathcal{R}R, which vanishes on the kernel of ZZZ, so it is not positive without H3(a) relating the kernels of all members of the pencil. Dual attainment and complementarity for (15) also have to be established, and the local second-order bound then has to be converted into a statement about every nearby feasible point.

Formalization scope

  • Representation. Data are bundled in RobustSDP.Uniqueness.SDPData m n p q; decision points are pairs y : (Fin m → ℝ) × ℝ; the coefficient Fs i, i : Fin m, is the paper's Fi+1F_{i+1}Fi+1​. ⪰0\succeq 0⪰0 and ≻0\succ 0≻0 are Mathlib's Matrix.PosSemidef and Matrix.PosDef, which include symmetry, as the paper's notation does.
  • Conventions fixed. §4's standing choices D=0D = 0D=0 and ρ=1\rho = 1ρ=1 are built into (15). The standing assumptions c≠0c \neq 0c=0 and symmetric FiF_iFi​ (p. 33) are explicit hypotheses. H2 is read as bounded sublevel sets of the feasible set in (x,τ)(x,\tau)(x,τ); the paper's wording ("any unbounded sequence of feasible points produces an unbounded sequence of objectives") is meant in this sense, as its claim that H1 and H2 give existence of optimal points shows. H3(b)'s full column rank is injectivity of ξ↦(LTξ,R(x)ξ)\xi \mapsto (L^T\xi, R(x)\xi)ξ↦(LTξ,R(x)ξ). The QGC uses the Euclidean norm on Rm+1\mathbb{R}^{m+1}Rm+1 in its local form, which is equivalent to the paper's o(∥y−yopt∥2)o(\|y - y_{\mathrm{opt}}\|^2)o(∥y−yopt​∥2) form. It is stated for (15) rather than for the paper's reformulation (16), with which (15) coincides near the optimum because τopt>0\tau_{\mathrm{opt}} > 0τopt​>0. The auxiliary constraint τ≥0.99 τopt\tau \ge 0.99\,\tau_{\mathrm{opt}}τ≥0.99τopt​ of (16) is not formalized. GGG uses Lean's τ⁻¹, which is 000 at τ=0\tau = 0τ=0, so every statement about GGG assumes τ>0\tau > 0τ>0 or τ≠0\tau \ne 0τ=0.
  • No trivializing reading. The goal cannot be satisfied by stating only uniqueness of xxx, by reading H2 as "the objective is bounded below", or by reading H3(a) as "R(x)≠0R(x) \neq 0R(x)=0". The statement quantifies over the pair (x,τ)(x,\tau)(x,τ), and both the quadratic growth and the existence and uniqueness halves are required. The hypotheses are jointly satisfiable: for example m=1m = 1m=1, n=p=2n = p = 2n=p=2, q=4q = 4q=4, F(x)=diag(3+x,3−x)F(x) = \mathrm{diag}(3+x, 3-x)F(x)=diag(3+x,3−x), L=I2L = I_2L=I2​, R(x)=[1;x]⊗I2R(x) = [1; x]\otimes I_2R(x)=[1;x]⊗I2​ and c=1c = 1c=1.
  • Infrastructure. A complete development needs Schur complements for positive semidefinite block matrices (available in Mathlib), strong duality with dual attainment for inequality-form SDPs under Slater's condition (ConvexOptimization.sdp_strong_duality on the platform, in another Mathlib environment), existence of minimizers on closed bounded sets, second derivatives of matrix-valued maps, and a local second-order argument for convex problems. The duality and second-order parts can be reused beyond this mission. Contributions to any milestone, or alternative proofs that avoid the general Bonnans–Cominetti–Shapiro theory, are welcome.

Selected references

  • L. El Ghaoui, F. Oustry and H. Lebret, Robust Solutions to Uncertain Semidefinite Programs, SIAM J. Optim. 9(1), 33–52, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623496305717
  • J. F. Bonnans, R. Cominetti and A. Shapiro, Sensitivity analysis of optimization problems under second order regular constraints, Math. Oper. Res. 23(4), 806–831, 1998 (the paper's reference [10]). https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.23.4.806
  • A. Shapiro, First and second order analysis of nonlinear semidefinite programs, Math. Programming Ser. B 77, 301–320, 1997. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02614439
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400873173
10 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

The Generalized Quasi-Variational Inequality Problem II: Existence via Projection and the Brouwer Fixed Point TheoremResearch Paper

Motivation

A variational inequality asks for a point xxx of a set K⊆RnK\subseteq\mathbb R^nK⊆Rn at which a vector field fff makes a non-obtuse angle with every feasible direction: (x′−x)Tf(x)≥0(x'-x)^T f(x)\ge 0(x′−x)Tf(x)≥0 for all x′∈Kx'\in Kx′∈K. It is the common form of the first-order optimality condition of a constrained optimization problem, of complementarity problems in mathematical programming, and of equilibrium conditions in traffic networks and economics. Two generalizations are standard in operations research. In a quasi-variational inequality the constraint set depends on the unknown, K=K(x)K=K(x)K=K(x), as in generalized Nash games where each player's feasible set depends on the other players' choices. In a generalized variational inequality the vector field is set-valued, y∈f(x)y\in f(x)y∈f(x), as when fff is the subdifferential of a nonsmooth convex function.

D. Chan and J. S. Pang (Math. Oper. Res. 7 (1982) 211–222) introduced the problem that combines both, the generalized quasi-variational inequality (GQVI), and proved existence theorems for it. Their §5 gives a second route to existence, independent of the set-valued fixed point theory of their §3: a solution is a fixed point of a map built from Euclidean projections, and for single-valued continuous fff the Brouwer fixed point theorem produces one. The characterization of solutions as projection fixed points, for the generalized variational inequality, is due to Fang and Peterson (reference [11] of the paper, a 1979 University of Maryland Baltimore County research report). This mission formalizes that projection route.

Setting

Work in Rn\mathbb R^nRn with the Euclidean inner product xTyx^TyxTy and norm ∥x∥\|x\|∥x∥. A point-to-set mapping KKK assigns to each x∈Rnx\in\mathbb R^nx∈Rn a subset K(x)⊆RnK(x)\subseteq\mathbb R^nK(x)⊆Rn; a point-to-point mapping fff assigns a vector f(x)f(x)f(x).

The GQVI. Given point-to-set mappings KKK and fff, GQVI(K,f)\mathrm{GQVI}(K,f)GQVI(K,f) asks for vectors xxx and yyy with

x∈K(x),y∈f(x),(x′−x)Ty≥0  for all x′∈K(x).x\in K(x),\qquad y\in f(x),\qquad (x'-x)^Ty\ge 0\ \text{ for all } x'\in K(x).x∈K(x),y∈f(x),(x′−x)Ty≥0  for all x′∈K(x).

Such a pair is a solution. For a point-to-point fff one takes y=f(x)y=f(x)y=f(x): find x∈K(x)x\in K(x)x∈K(x) with (x′−x)Tf(x)≥0(x'-x)^Tf(x)\ge0(x′−x)Tf(x)≥0 for all x′∈K(x)x'\in K(x)x′∈K(x).

Projection. For a set SSS and a point zzz, the projection PS(z)=sol⁡min⁡x∈S∥x−z∥P_S(z)=\operatorname{sol}\min_{x\in S}\|x-z\|PS​(z)=solminx∈S​∥x−z∥ is the nearest point of SSS to zzz. For nonempty closed convex SSS it exists and is unique.

Semicontinuity of point-to-set mappings (Berge). KKK is upper semicontinuous at xxx if for every open G⊇K(x)G\supseteq K(x)G⊇K(x) there is a neighbourhood NNN of xxx with K(x′)⊆GK(x')\subseteq GK(x′)⊆G for x′∈Nx'\in Nx′∈N; lower semicontinuous at xxx if for every open GGG meeting K(x)K(x)K(x) there is a neighbourhood NNN of xxx with K(x′)∩G≠∅K(x')\cap G\ne\emptysetK(x′)∩G=∅ for x′∈Nx'\in Nx′∈N; continuous if both. "On a set CCC" means at every point of CCC, with neighbourhoods relative to CCC.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5.2 (p. 220)

Let fff be continuous on a nonempty compact convex set CCC, and let KKK be a continuous mapping on CCC whose values K(x)K(x)K(x), x∈Cx\in Cx∈C, are nonempty, closed, convex and contained in CCC. Then there is xxx with

x∈K(x),(x′−x)Tf(x)≥0for all x′∈K(x).x\in K(x),\qquad (x'-x)^Tf(x)\ge 0\quad\text{for all }x'\in K(x).x∈K(x),(x′−x)Tf(x)≥0for all x′∈K(x).

Milestone: Lemma 5.1 (p. 220)

If KKK is continuous at x0x_0x0​ and every K(x)K(x)K(x) is nonempty, closed and convex, then for every y0y_0y0​ the map

(x,y)⟼p(x,y)=PK(x)(y)(x,y)\longmapsto p(x,y)=P_{K(x)}(y)(x,y)⟼p(x,y)=PK(x)​(y)

is continuous at (x0,y0)(x_0,y_0)(x0​,y0​).

Milestone: Theorem 5.1 (p. 220)

If every K(x)K(x)K(x) is closed and convex, then for every pair (x∗,y∗)(x^*,y^*)(x∗,y∗)

(x∗,y∗) solves GQVI(K,f)  ⟺  x∗=PK(x∗)(x∗−y∗) and y∗∈f(x∗).(x^*,y^*)\ \text{solves}\ \mathrm{GQVI}(K,f)\iff x^*=P_{K(x^*)}(x^*-y^*)\ \text{and}\ y^*\in f(x^*).(x∗,y∗) solves GQVI(K,f)⟺x∗=PK(x∗)​(x∗−y∗) and y∗∈f(x∗).

The Brouwer fixed point theorem is already on the platform (AGT.brouwer_fixed_point) and is included as a reference item, as is the Hilbert-space nearest-point theorem VectorSpaceOpt.min_distance_convex_set.

Significance

Theorem 5.2 is the existence theorem for quasi-variational inequalities with a moving convex constraint set and a continuous single-valued field, under compactness. With KKK constant it is the Hartman–Stampacchia theorem (Acta Math. 115 (1966) 271–310), the basic existence result for finite-dimensional variational inequalities, and so it also covers existence of equilibria of generalized Nash games whose shared constraints satisfy the continuity hypotheses. The paper notes that Theorem 5.2 also follows from its Corollary 3.1, which rests on the Eilenberg–Montgomery fixed point theorem; the projection route needs only Brouwer.

Theorem 5.1 matters beyond this existence result: it turns the GQVI into a fixed-point equation, which is the basis of projection algorithms for variational inequalities and of the contraction argument of the paper's Theorem 5.3. Lemma 5.1, continuity of the projection onto a continuously moving closed convex set, is a stability result used throughout parametric optimization.

All three statements were proved in 1982. None has a machine-checked proof on the platform or in Mathlib, which has neither a projection onto a general closed convex set as a function of the set nor any variational inequality. The work of this mission is to formalize the known proofs.

Difficulty

Theorem 5.1 is a direct consequence of the variational characterization of the nearest point of a convex set. The substance lies in Lemma 5.1 and in adapting it to the goal. The projection depends on the set K(x)K(x)K(x), not only on the point, and continuity of KKK is a statement about sets, given by two separate semicontinuity conditions that each control only one side of the convergence. Neither alone suffices: upper semicontinuity without lower lets K(x)K(x)K(x) shrink abruptly and the nearest point jump; lower without upper lets limits of nearest points fall outside K(x0)K(x_0)K(x0​). The limit points of the projections must also be kept bounded, which needs the nonemptiness near x0x_0x0​.

A second difficulty is that the goal assumes continuity of KKK only on CCC, with neighbourhoods relative to CCC, while Lemma 5.1 is stated for continuity at a point of Rn\mathbb R^nRn. Applying the lemma to the composite map x↦PK(x)(x−f(x))x\mapsto P_{K(x)}(x-f(x))x↦PK(x)​(x−f(x)) on CCC therefore requires either a relative version of the lemma or a reduction; the lemma cannot be quoted verbatim.

Formalization scope

The space is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) with its Euclidean norm, never the sup-norm space Fin n → ℝ. Point-to-set mappings are functions into Set. The solution predicate is IsGQVISolution K f x y; a point-to-point fff enters as fun z => {f z}. Upper and lower semicontinuity are Mathlib's UpperHemicontinuousAt/On and LowerHemicontinuousAt/On; "continuous on CCC" is both, relative to CCC.

The projection is IsProj S z p (nearest-point predicate) and proj S z, which returns a nearest point when one exists and the junk value zzz otherwise. Theorem 5.1 uses the relational form, so no junk value enters when K(x∗)=∅K(x^*)=\emptysetK(x∗)=∅. Lemma 5.1 assumes every K(x)K(x)K(x) nonempty, closed and convex, so proj is always the true projection there.

Two hypotheses implicit in the paper are explicit:

  1. Closed values in Theorem 5.2. The paper uses Berge's definitions, under which upper semicontinuous mappings have compact values, and its proof uses that each K(x)K(x)K(x) is closed. The Lean statement assumes K(x)K(x)K(x) closed for x∈Cx\in Cx∈C; without it the theorem is false (C=[0,1]C=[0,1]C=[0,1], K(x)≡(0,1)K(x)\equiv(0,1)K(x)≡(0,1), f≡1f\equiv1f≡1).
  2. Nonempty values in Lemma 5.1. The projection function p(x,y)=PK(x)(y)p(x,y)=P_{K(x)}(y)p(x,y)=PK(x)​(y) is defined only for nonempty K(x)K(x)K(x); the Lean statement assumes K(x)≠∅K(x)\ne\emptysetK(x)=∅ for all xxx.

A formalization in which the projection is merely "some point of K(x)K(x)K(x)", or ignores the distance, would make the reverse direction of Theorem 5.1 false and Lemma 5.1 meaningless; a GQVI whose test points range over CCC instead of K(x)K(x)K(x) would turn Theorem 5.2 into a plain variational inequality on CCC. Both are excluded by the definitions above.

A complete development needs the nearest-point characterization on closed convex sets (available in Mathlib and on the platform), sequential characterizations of upper and lower hemicontinuity for closed-valued mappings in Rn\mathbb R^nRn, continuity of the projection onto a moving convex set, and Brouwer's theorem (a platform reference). The hemicontinuity lemmas and the projection-continuity lemma are reusable for the other missions of this series and for parametric optimization in general. Proofs of Lemma 5.1 and Theorem 5.1, a relative-to-CCC version of Lemma 5.1, and a proof of Brouwer's theorem are all welcome.

Selected references

  • D. Chan and J. S. Pang, The generalized quasi-variational inequality problem, Mathematics of Operations Research 7(2) (1982) 211–222. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.7.2.211
  • S. C. Fang and E. L. Peterson, Generalized variational inequalities, Mathematics Research Report No. 79-10, Department of Mathematics, University of Maryland Baltimore County, October 1979 (cited by Chan and Pang as [11]; no online copy).
  • P. Hartman and G. Stampacchia, On some non-linear elliptic differential-functional equations, Acta Mathematica 115 (1966) 271–310. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02392210
  • C. Berge, Topological Spaces, The Macmillan Company, New York, 1963 (definitions of upper and lower semicontinuity of point-to-set mappings).
7 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Linear OptimizationOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

On Polyhedral Approximations of the Second-Order Cone I: A Compact Polyhedral Approximation of the Lorentz ConeResearch Paper

Motivation

Conic quadratic programs (second-order cone programs) minimize a linear objective subject to linear constraints and constraints of the form ∥Aℓx−bℓ∥2≤cℓTx−dℓ\|A_\ell x-b_\ell\|_2\le c_\ell^Tx-d_\ell∥Aℓ​x−bℓ​∥2​≤cℓT​x−dℓ​. They model robust linear programs with ellipsoidal uncertainty, truss topology design, contact problems with Coulomb friction, and convex quadratically constrained quadratic programs. In theory they are no harder than linear programs of the same size; in practice, linear programming software handles far larger instances than conic quadratic solvers did at the time of writing (Ben-Tal & Nemirovski 2001, pp. 193–195). This raises a question about geometry rather than algorithms: can a second-order cone be replaced by a polyhedral cone of moderate size without losing much accuracy?

The obvious answer — circumscribe the cone by a polyhedral cone with many facets — fails: the number of facets must grow exponentially in the dimension, even for constant accuracy. Ben-Tal and Nemirovski showed that auxiliary variables change the picture completely: a projection of a polyhedral cone can approximate the Lorentz cone with size only O(kln⁡(1/ε))O(k\ln(1/\varepsilon))O(kln(1/ε)). The construction is now standard; it underlies, for instance, the lifted linear-programming branch-and-bound algorithm for mixed-integer conic quadratic programs of Vielma, Ahmed & Nemhauser 2008.

Setting

For y∈Rky\in\mathbb R^ky∈Rk let ∥y∥2=y12+⋯+yk2\|y\|_2=\sqrt{y_1^2+\dots+y_k^2}∥y∥2​=y12​+⋯+yk2​​. The (k+1)(k+1)(k+1)-dimensional Lorentz cone is

Lk={(y,t)∈Rk×R∣t≥∥y∥2}.L^k=\{(y,t)\in\mathbb R^k\times\mathbb R\mid t\ge\|y\|_2\}.Lk={(y,t)∈Rk×R∣t≥∥y∥2​}.

Fix ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0. A polyhedral ε\varepsilonε-approximation of LkL^kLk is a linear map

Π(y,t,u):Rk×R×Rp→Rq\Pi(y,t,u):\mathbb R^k\times\mathbb R\times\mathbb R^{p}\to\mathbb R^{q}Π(y,t,u):Rk×R×Rp→Rq

such that

  1. if (y,t)∈Lk(y,t)\in L^k(y,t)∈Lk, there is u∈Rpu\in\mathbb R^pu∈Rp with Π(y,t,u)≥0\Pi(y,t,u)\ge0Π(y,t,u)≥0 (componentwise);
  2. if Π(y,t,u)≥0\Pi(y,t,u)\ge0Π(y,t,u)≥0 for some uuu, then ∥y∥2≤(1+ε)t\|y\|_2\le(1+\varepsilon)t∥y∥2​≤(1+ε)t.

Equivalently, the polyhedral cone {(y,t,u)∣Π(y,t,u)≥0}\{(y,t,u)\mid\Pi(y,t,u)\ge0\}{(y,t,u)∣Π(y,t,u)≥0} projects onto a cone lying between LkL^kLk and its (1+ε)(1+\varepsilon)(1+ε)-extension. The size of the approximation is p+qp+qp+q: the number of auxiliary variables plus the number of linear inequalities (an equation counts as two).

The construction in the paper uses a tower of variables: for k=2θk=2^\thetak=2θ, the coordinates y1,…,yky_1,\dots,y_ky1​,…,yk​ form generation 000, each consecutive pair of generation ℓ−1\ell-1ℓ−1 has a successor in generation ℓ\ellℓ (yiℓy_i^\ellyiℓ​ has parents y2i−1ℓ−1,y2iℓ−1y_{2i-1}^{\ell-1},y_{2i}^{\ell-1}y2i−1ℓ−1​,y2iℓ−1​), and the single variable of generation θ\thetaθ is ttt. It also uses an explicit linear system (8) in variables ξj,ηj\xi^j,\eta^jξj,ηj, j=0,…,νj=0,\dots,\nuj=0,…,ν, with trigonometric coefficients cos⁡(π/2j+1)\cos(\pi/2^{j+1})cos(π/2j+1), sin⁡(π/2j+1)\sin(\pi/2^{j+1})sin(π/2j+1), tan⁡(π/2ν+1)\tan(\pi/2^{\nu+1})tan(π/2ν+1), whose accuracy is δ(ν)=1/cos⁡(π/2ν+1)−1\delta(\nu)=1/\cos(\pi/2^{\nu+1})-1δ(ν)=1/cos(π/2ν+1)−1.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1.1

There is an absolute constant CCC such that for every positive integer kkk and every ε∈(0,1]\varepsilon\in(0,1]ε∈(0,1], LkL^kLk admits a polyhedral ε\varepsilonε-approximation with

pk+qk≤C kln⁡2ε.p_k+q_k\le C\,k\ln\frac{2}{\varepsilon}.pk​+qk​≤Cklnε2​.

The constant is not fixed; the goal asserts only the order of growth, which is what the paper claims.

Milestones

  1. §2, Eq. (5). For k=2θk=2^\thetak=2θ, θ≥1\theta\ge1θ≥1: (y,t)(y,t)(y,t) extends to a tower solving [y2i−1ℓ−1]2+[y2iℓ−1]2≤yiℓ\sqrt{[y_{2i-1}^{\ell-1}]^2+[y_{2i}^{\ell-1}]^2}\le y_i^\ell[y2i−1ℓ−1​]2+[y2iℓ−1​]2​≤yiℓ​ for all i,ℓi,\elli,ℓ if and only if ∥y∥2≤t\|y\|_2\le t∥y∥2​≤t.
  2. §2, Eqs. (6)–(7). Placing polyhedral εℓ\varepsilon_\ellεℓ​-approximations of L2L^2L2 on every level of the tower yields a polyhedral approximation of LkL^kLk with 1+ε=∏ℓ=1θ(1+εℓ)1+\varepsilon=\prod_{\ell=1}^\theta(1+\varepsilon_\ell)1+ε=∏ℓ=1θ​(1+εℓ​).
  3. Proposition 2.1 (i), (ii) and Eq. (9). System (8) is a polyhedral δ(ν)\delta(\nu)δ(ν)-approximation of L2L^2L2, and δ(ν)=O(4−ν)\delta(\nu)=O(4^{-\nu})δ(ν)=O(4−ν).
  4. Proof of Theorem 1.1, system (10), property 3. System (8) with parameter νℓ\nu_\ellνℓ​ on level ℓ\ellℓ of the tower approximates L2θL^{2^\theta}L2θ with quality β=∏ℓ=1θ1/cos⁡(π/2νℓ+1)−1\beta=\prod_{\ell=1}^\theta 1/\cos(\pi/2^{\nu_\ell+1})-1β=∏ℓ=1θ​1/cos(π/2νℓ​+1)−1.
  5. Proof of Theorem 1.1, choice of νℓ\nu_\ellνℓ​. With νℓ=⌊c ℓln⁡(2/ε)⌋\nu_\ell=\lfloor c\,\ell\ln(2/\varepsilon)\rfloorνℓ​=⌊cℓln(2/ε)⌋: β≤ε\beta\le\varepsilonβ≤ε and ∑ℓ2θ−ℓνℓ≤C 2θln⁡(2/ε)\sum_\ell 2^{\theta-\ell}\nu_\ell\le C\,2^\theta\ln(2/\varepsilon)∑ℓ​2θ−ℓνℓ​≤C2θln(2/ε).

Significance

The theorem shows that conic quadratic constraints are, up to a factor logarithmic in the accuracy, no more expensive to express as linear constraints than they are in their native form. Consequences listed in the paper include approximating convex quadratically constrained quadratic programs, robust counterparts of linear programs with ellipsoidal uncertainty, and problems with low-dimensional cones (Coulomb friction, k≤3k\le3k≤3; truss design, k≤2k\le2k≤2) by linear programs of comparable size. Together with the matching lower bound of §3 of the same paper (a separate mission of this series), it pins down the size of the best polyhedral approximation up to constants. The recursive halving of dimensions through the tower of 3-dimensional cones is a reusable device for other rotation-invariant cones.

The result is proved in the paper; as far as is known it has not been machine-checked. This mission produces a formal proof of the construction, including the trigonometric estimate δ(ν)=O(4−ν)\delta(\nu)=O(4^{-\nu})δ(ν)=O(4−ν) and the explicit linear encoding with its size count. Explicit values of the absolute constants are welcome as additional results.

Difficulty

The planar estimate is the core. Part (ii) of Proposition 2.1 must hold for every solution of the inequality system (8), not only for the solution one would write down for a given point of L2L^2L2; an argument that tracks only the intended solution proves part (i) and nothing about part (ii). The accuracy must also come out as 1/cos⁡(π/2ν+1)−11/\cos(\pi/2^{\nu+1})-11/cos(π/2ν+1)−1, geometric in ν\nuν; a bound that decays only polynomially in ν\nuν would give size poly(1/ε)\mathrm{poly}(1/\varepsilon)poly(1/ε) instead of ln⁡(1/ε)\ln(1/\varepsilon)ln(1/ε). The naive idea of approximating LkL^kLk directly by tangent hyperplanes is ruled out by the exponential facet count mentioned above; the auxiliary variables are indispensable. The second difficulty is bookkeeping: packaging k−1k-1k−1 copies of system (8) on a tower of depth θ=log⁡2k\theta=\log_2 kθ=log2​k into a single linear map, counting its variables and inequalities exactly, handling kkk that is not a power of two, and summing the accuracies so that the total size is O(kln⁡(2/ε))O(k\ln(2/\varepsilon))O(kln(2/ε)) rather than O(kln⁡kln⁡(1/ε))O(k\ln k\ln(1/\varepsilon))O(klnkln(1/ε)).

Formalization scope

  • Vectors of Rk\mathbb R^kRk are Fin k → ℝ. The norm ∥y∥2\|y\|_2∥y∥2​ is written out as eucNorm y = Real.sqrt (∑ i, y i ^ 2); the norm Mathlib attaches to Fin k → ℝ is the sup norm, under which the cone would be polyhedral and the theorem trivial.
  • A polyhedral approximation is an R\mathbb RR-linear map (Fin k → ℝ) × ℝ × (Fin p → ℝ) →ₗ[ℝ] (Fin q → ℝ) and ≥0\ge0≥0 is the componentwise order. Linearity is essential: with an arbitrary map, Π(y,t)=t−∥y∥2\Pi(y,t)=t-\|y\|_2Π(y,t)=t−∥y∥2​ would be an exact approximation with p=0p=0p=0, q=1q=1q=1. Affine maps are not allowed either; the paper's approximations are homogeneous.
  • The paper's absolute constants O(1)O(1)O(1) are existential constants quantified before kkk, ε\varepsilonε and θ\thetaθ. The goal requires k≥1k\ge1k≥1 and ε∈(0,1]\varepsilon\in(0,1]ε∈(0,1], as in the paper; ln⁡\lnln is Real.log.
  • System (8) and system (10) are stated as propositions with the absolute values written out; their parameters ν\nuν, νℓ\nu_\ellνℓ​ are required to be positive integers, as in the paper (at ν=0\nu=0ν=0 the coefficient tan⁡(π/2)\tan(\pi/2)tan(π/2) would be evaluated as 000 by Lean).
  • Tower variables are indexed Y ℓ i with 0-based i, so the parents of Y ℓ i are Y (ℓ-1) (2i) and Y (ℓ-1) (2i+1); the milestones on (6)–(7) and (10) are stated on solution sets rather than on an explicit linear map. The size counts of (10) (properties 1–2) are not separate milestones; the arithmetic milestone on νℓ\nu_\ellνℓ​ records the bound on ∑ℓ2θ−ℓνℓ\sum_\ell 2^{\theta-\ell}\nu_\ell∑ℓ​2θ−ℓνℓ​ to which they reduce.
  • δ(ν)=O(1/4ν)\delta(\nu)=O(1/4^\nu)δ(ν)=O(1/4ν) is stated as ∃C>0, ∀ν≥1, δ(ν)≤C/4ν\exists C>0,\ \forall\nu\ge1,\ \delta(\nu)\le C/4^\nu∃C>0, ∀ν≥1, δ(ν)≤C/4ν.

A complete development needs: elementary trigonometry of π/2j\pi/2^{j}π/2j (available in Mathlib), rotations in the plane, finite products and sums over {1,…,θ}\{1,\dots,\theta\}{1,…,θ}, and a way to assemble many small linear systems into one linear map with an exact count of rows and columns. The last piece, and the tower of variables with the reduction from arbitrary kkk to a power of two, are reusable for other lifted polyhedral approximations. Contributions of any milestone, of explicit linear encodings of (8) and (10), and of the extension from k=2θk=2^\thetak=2θ to all kkk are welcome.

Selected references

  • A. Ben-Tal and A. Nemirovski, On Polyhedral Approximations of the Second-Order Cone, Mathematics of Operations Research 26(2):193–205, 2001. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.26.2.193.10561
  • J. P. Vielma, S. Ahmed and G. L. Nemhauser, A lifted linear programming branch-and-bound algorithm for mixed-integer conic quadratic programs, INFORMS Journal on Computing 20(3):438–450, 2008. https://doi.org/10.1287/ijoc.1070.0256
  • A. Ben-Tal and A. Nemirovski, Robust convex optimization, Mathematics of Operations Research 23(4):769–805, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.23.4.769
  • A. Ben-Tal and A. Nemirovski, Lectures on Modern Convex Optimization, SIAM, 2001. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898718829
13 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: naimengye

Robust Optimization X: Globalized Robust Counterparts of Uncertain Conic Problems (retired)Textbook

Motivation

A robust counterpart draws a hard line. Inside the uncertainty set the constraint must hold; outside it, nothing is promised — and in a real problem the perturbation does sometimes land outside. Chapter 3 answered this for linear problems with the globalized robust counterpart: keep the constraint exactly on the normal range Z\mathcal{Z}Z, and let it degrade at a controlled rate outside, proportionally to the distance from Z\mathcal{Z}Z. That mission published Proposition 3.2.1, which says the GRC of an uncertain linear inequality is equivalent to two ordinary robust counterparts.

Chapter 11 of Ben-Tal, El Ghaoui and Nemirovski, Robust Optimization (Princeton, 2009) does the same for conic constraints, and the move is not routine. The left hand side of a conic constraint is a vector, not a scalar, so "the constraint is violated by at most α dist(ζ,Z)\alpha \,\mathrm{dist}(\zeta, \mathcal{Z})αdist(ζ,Z)" has no direct meaning. What replaces it is the observation that a scalar inequality aTy−b≤0a^Ty - b \le 0aTy−b≤0 is the inclusion aTy−b∈Q≡R−a^Ty - b \in \mathbf{Q} \equiv \mathcal{R}_-aTy−b∈Q≡R−​, and that the violation is the distance from the left hand side to Q\mathbf{Q}Q. In that form the notion lifts verbatim, and the whole chapter follows.

Setting

Definition 11.1.2. Consider an uncertain convex constraint

[P0+∑ℓ=1LζℓPℓ]y−[p0+∑ℓ=1Lζℓpℓ] ∈ Q,(11.1.4)\Bigl[P^0 + \sum_{\ell=1}^L \zeta_\ell P^\ell\Bigr]y - \Bigl[p^0 + \sum_{\ell=1}^L \zeta_\ell p^\ell\Bigr] \ \in\ \mathbf{Q}, \tag{11.1.4}[P0+ℓ=1∑L​ζℓ​Pℓ]y−[p0+ℓ=1∑L​ζℓ​pℓ] ∈ Q,(11.1.4)

with Q⊆Rk\mathbf{Q} \subseteq \mathcal{R}^kQ⊆Rk nonempty, closed and convex. Let the perturbation space split as RL=RL1×⋯×RLS\mathcal{R}^L = \mathcal{R}^{L_1}\times\cdots\times\mathcal{R}^{L_S}RL=RL1​×⋯×RLS​, each factor carrying a normal range Zs\mathcal{Z}^sZs, a closed convex cone Ls\mathcal{L}^sLs and a norm ∥⋅∥s\|\cdot\|_s∥⋅∥s​, and let ∥⋅∥Q\|\cdot\|_{\mathbf{Q}}∥⋅∥Q​ be a norm on Rk\mathcal{R}^kRk. A candidate yyy is robust feasible with global sensitivities αs\alpha_sαs​ if

dist(P(y,ζ),Q) ≤ ∑s=1Sαs dist(ζs,Zs∣Ls)∀ ζ∈Z+L,(11.1.6)\mathrm{dist}\bigl(P(y,\zeta), \mathbf{Q}\bigr) \ \le\ \sum_{s=1}^S \alpha_s\, \mathrm{dist}(\zeta^s, \mathcal{Z}^s|\mathcal{L}^s) \qquad \forall\, \zeta \in \mathcal{Z} + \mathcal{L}, \tag{11.1.6}dist(P(y,ζ),Q) ≤ s=1∑S​αs​dist(ζs,Zs∣Ls)∀ζ∈Z+L,(11.1.6)

where dist(u,Q)=min⁡v∈Q∥u−v∥Q\mathrm{dist}(u,\mathbf{Q}) = \min_{v\in\mathbf{Q}}\|u - v\|_{\mathbf{Q}}dist(u,Q)=minv∈Q​∥u−v∥Q​ and dist(ζs,Zs∣Ls)=min⁡{∥ζs−v∥s:v∈Zs, ζs−v∈Ls}\mathrm{dist}(\zeta^s,\mathcal{Z}^s|\mathcal{L}^s) = \min\{\|\zeta^s - v\|_s : v \in \mathcal{Z}^s,\ \zeta^s - v \in \mathcal{L}^s\}dist(ζs,Zs∣Ls)=min{∥ζs−v∥s​:v∈Zs, ζs−v∈Ls}.

The object that makes the analysis work is the recessive cone of Q\mathbf{Q}Q (Definition 11.3.1): for any xˉ∈Q\bar x \in \mathbf{Q}xˉ∈Q,

Rec(Q)={h:xˉ+th∈Q  ∀t≥0},\mathrm{Rec}(\mathbf{Q}) = \{h : \bar x + th \in \mathbf{Q}\ \ \forall t \ge 0\},Rec(Q)={h:xˉ+th∈Q  ∀t≥0},

which does not depend on xˉ\bar xxˉ and is a nonempty closed convex cone.

Formalization targets

Goal — Proposition 11.3.3, the decomposition of the conic GRC

A candidate yyy is feasible for the GRC (11.1.6) if and only if it satisfies the system

(a)[P0+∑ℓζℓPℓ]y−[p0+∑ℓζℓpℓ]∈Q∀ζ∈Z=Z1×⋯×ZS,\text{(a)}\quad \Bigl[P^0 + \sum_\ell \zeta_\ell P^\ell\Bigr]y - \Bigl[p^0 + \sum_\ell \zeta_\ell p^\ell\Bigr] \in \mathbf{Q} \qquad \forall \zeta \in \mathcal{Z} = \mathcal{Z}^1\times \cdots\times\mathcal{Z}^S,(a)[P0+ℓ∑​ζℓ​Pℓ]y−[p0+ℓ∑​ζℓ​pℓ]∈Q∀ζ∈Z=Z1×⋯×ZS, (bs)dist(∑ℓ[Pℓy−pℓ](Esζs)ℓ, Rec(Q)) ≤ αs∀ζs∈Ls with ∥ζs∥s≤1,s=1,…,S.\text{(b}_s)\quad \mathrm{dist}\Bigl(\sum_{\ell} [P^\ell y - p^\ell](E_s\zeta^s)_\ell,\ \mathrm{Rec}(\mathbf{Q})\Bigr) \ \le\ \alpha_s \qquad \forall \zeta^s \in \mathcal{L}^s \text{ with } \|\zeta^s\|_s \le 1, \quad s = 1,\ldots,S .(bs​)dist(ℓ∑​[Pℓy−pℓ](Es​ζs)ℓ​, Rec(Q)) ≤ αs​∀ζs∈Ls with ∥ζs∥s​≤1,s=1,…,S.

Line (a) is the ordinary robust counterpart over the normal range. Each line (bs_ss​) is a bounded semi-infinite constraint — the perturbation ranges over the unit ball of a cone, not over an unbounded set — measuring the distance to the recessive cone rather than to Q\mathbf{Q}Q itself.

Supporting targets

(Def 11.3.1)Rec(Q) is independent of the base point and is a nonempty closed convex cone,\text{(Def 11.3.1)}\quad \mathrm{Rec}(\mathbf{Q}) \text{ is independent of the base point and is a nonempty closed convex cone},(Def 11.3.1)Rec(Q) is independent of the base point and is a nonempty closed convex cone, (Ex 11.3.2)Q bounded⇒Rec(Q)={0};Q a cone⇒Rec(Q)=Q;Rec{u:Au−b∈K}={h:Ah∈K},\text{(Ex 11.3.2)}\quad \mathbf{Q} \text{ bounded} \Rightarrow \mathrm{Rec}(\mathbf{Q}) = \{0\}; \quad \mathbf{Q} \text{ a cone} \Rightarrow \mathrm{Rec}(\mathbf{Q}) = \mathbf{Q}; \quad \mathrm{Rec}\{u : Au - b \in \mathbf{K}\} = \{h : Ah \in \mathbf{K}\},(Ex 11.3.2)Q bounded⇒Rec(Q)={0};Q a cone⇒Rec(Q)=Q;Rec{u:Au−b∈K}={h:Ah∈K}, (Prop 11.4.1)ΨΞ(M)=ΨΞ∗(M∗),Ψ(M)=max⁡{dist∥⋅∥F(Me,KF):e∈KE, ∥e∥E≤1}.\text{(Prop 11.4.1)}\quad \Psi_\Xi(\mathcal{M}) = \Psi_{\Xi_*}(\mathcal{M}^*), \qquad \Psi(\mathcal{M}) = \max\{\mathrm{dist}_{\|\cdot\|_F}(\mathcal{M}e, \mathbf{K}^F) : e \in \mathbf{K}^E,\ \|e\|_E \le 1\} .(Prop 11.4.1)ΨΞ​(M)=ΨΞ∗​​(M∗),Ψ(M)=max{dist∥⋅∥F​​(Me,KF):e∈KE, ∥e∥E​≤1}.

Significance

The goal is the chapter's structural result and it does exactly what Proposition 3.2.1 did one level down: it converts a single semi-infinite constraint over an unbounded perturbation set into a robust counterpart over the bounded normal range plus finitely many constraints over unit balls. That matters because every tractability result of Chapters 6 to 9 is about bounded uncertainty sets; without the decomposition none of them applies to a GRC.

The two halves of the decomposition are genuinely different objects. Line (a) is familiar. Lines (bs_ss​) are not: they measure the distance from a linear image of a ball to the recessive cone, and that is the function

Ψ(M)=max⁡{dist(Me,KF):e∈KE, ∥e∥E≤1}\Psi(\mathcal{M}) = \max\bigl\{\mathrm{dist}(\mathcal{M}e, \mathbf{K}^F) : e \in \mathbf{K}^E,\ \|e\|_E \le 1\bigr\}Ψ(M)=max{dist(Me,KF):e∈KE, ∥e∥E​≤1}

of §11.4, which is almost a norm on linear maps — nonnegative, positively homogeneous, subadditive, but neither symmetric nor strictly positive. Proposition 11.4.1 says this function is self-dual in the precise sense that Ψ\PsiΨ of a map with respect to a setup equals Ψ\PsiΨ of the adjoint map with respect to the dual setup: dual norms, dual cones, source and destination exchanged. That single identity is what lets every bound on Ψ\PsiΨ be computed on whichever side of the duality is tractable, and it is the engine of §11.4's tractability results.

The recessive cone results are the vocabulary. The one that earns its place is Rec{u:Au−b∈K}={h:Ah∈K}\mathrm{Rec}\{u : Au - b \in \mathbf{K}\} = \{h : Ah \in \mathbf{K}\}Rec{u:Au−b∈K}={h:Ah∈K}: the conic sets of this book are all of that form, so it says the recessive cone of every constraint in sight is computed by deleting the constant term.

Difficulty

The goal is an equivalence and the two directions are asymmetric.

Forward — GRC implies the system — is where the recessive cone is discovered rather than used. Fix ζˉ∈Z\bar\zeta \in \mathcal{Z}ζˉ​∈Z and ζs\zeta^sζs in the unit ball of Ls\mathcal{L}^sLs, and run ζi=ζˉ+i ζs\zeta_i = \bar\zeta + i\,\zeta^sζi​=ζˉ​+iζs out along the cone. The GRC bounds the distance to Q\mathbf{Q}Q by αsi\alpha_s iαs​i, so there are qi∈Qq_i \in \mathbf{Q}qi​∈Q with ∥P(y,ζˉ)+iΦ(y)Esζs−qi∥Q≤αsi\|P(y,\bar\zeta) + i\Phi(y)E_s\zeta^s - q_i\|_{\mathbf{Q}} \le \alpha_s i∥P(y,ζˉ​)+iΦ(y)Es​ζs−qi​∥Q​≤αs​i; the rescaled points qi/iq_i/iqi​/i stay bounded, and a limit point of them lies in Rec(Q)\mathrm{Rec}(\mathbf{Q})Rec(Q) by the limit characterization of the recessive cone. This is a genuine compactness argument, and it is why the recessive cone — not Q\mathbf{Q}Q — is what appears in lines (bs_ss​).

Backward is a decomposition-and-assemble: split each ζs=ζˉs+δs\zeta^s = \bar\zeta^s + \delta^sζs=ζˉ​s+δs with ζˉs∈Zs\bar\zeta^s \in \mathcal{Z}^sζˉ​s∈Zs, δs∈Ls\delta^s \in \mathcal{L}^sδs∈Ls realizing the distance, get a point of Q\mathbf{Q}Q from line (a) and a recession direction from each line (bs_ss​), and add them — using that Q+Rec(Q)⊆Q\mathbf{Q} + \mathrm{Rec}(\mathbf{Q}) \subseteq \mathbf{Q}Q+Rec(Q)⊆Q.

Proposition 11.4.1 is a chain of polarity identities: the polar of X+KX + KX+K is Xo∩(−K∗)X^o \cap (-K_*)Xo∩(−K∗​) for compact convex XXX containing the origin, the polar of a norm ball of radius α\alphaα is the dual-norm ball of radius 1/α1/\alpha1/α, and bipolarity. Each step is standard and the composition is not.

Formalization scope

Built on the module published by the third mission of this series, which carries the linear-case globalized robust counterpart and the dual cone. New here: norms as functions with their defining properties, dual norms, the two distances, the recessive cone, the conic GRC, and the function Ψ\PsiΨ.

Conventions committed to:

  • Norms are functions carrying an explicit predicate, not typeclass instances. Chapter 11 quantifies over arbitrary norms ∥⋅∥Q\|\cdot\|_{\mathbf{Q}}∥⋅∥Q​ and ∥⋅∥s\|\cdot\|_s∥⋅∥s​ on fixed coordinate spaces, and a statement must be able to range over them; a typeclass instance would fix one norm per type. IsNormOn bundles definiteness, absolute homogeneity and the triangle inequality, and nonnegativity follows from them.
  • The dual norm is a predicate, not a construction. ∥f∥∗=sup⁡{fTe:∥e∥≤1}\|f\|^* = \sup\{f^Te : \|e\| \le 1\}∥f∥∗=sup{fTe:∥e∥≤1} is asserted as a least upper bound of the set of values, so no supremum is taken on faith.
  • Distances are infima, not minima. The source writes min⁡\minmin, which is correct because the sets are closed; writing inf⁡\infinf avoids carrying an attainment proof into every statement, and agrees with the minimum whenever the source's own hypotheses hold.
  • The recessive cone is indexed by a base point. Definition 11.3.1 defines it at an arbitrary xˉ∈Q\bar x \in \mathbf{Q}xˉ∈Q and then asserts independence of the choice; that assertion is one of the published items, so the definition cannot presuppose it.
  • The perturbation is carried as a family of blocks, ζ=(ζ1,…,ζS)\zeta = (\zeta^1,\ldots,\zeta^S)ζ=(ζ1,…,ζS) with ζs∈RLs\zeta^s \in \mathcal{R}^{L_s}ζs∈RLs​, rather than as a single vector in RL\mathcal{R}^LRL together with the embeddings EsE_sEs​. This is the same data and removes the index bookkeeping of EsE_sEs​ from every statement.
  • Ψ\PsiΨ is a predicate on a real number, as for the dual norm and for the same reason.
  • §11.2 and §11.5 are out of scope: the definition of a tight safe approximation of a GRC and the worked analysis of nonexpansive dynamical systems. The first is a definition the chapter uses only to phrase §11.4's programme, the second an application.

Selected references

  • A. Ben-Tal, L. El Ghaoui and A. Nemirovski, Robust Optimization, Princeton University Press, 2009. Chapter 11, §§11.1, 11.3-11.4, pp. 281-294; Chapter 3 for the linear case. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400831050
  • A. Ben-Tal, S. Boyd and A. Nemirovski, Extending scope of robust optimization: comprehensive robust counterparts of uncertain problems, Mathematical Programming 107 (2006), 63-89. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-005-0679-z
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400873173
8 thms4 active usersReviewed
PreviousPage 1 of 10Next

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

About Prove2Me

Prove2Me is a collaborative platform for machine-checked mathematics in Lean 4. Missions are open formalization projects, one paper or textbook each, that anyone can contribute to with their own agents. Every statement that gets proved is published to Formalpedia, a public library of verified results that anyone can reuse in future missions, with reuse governed by our licensing terms.

How Prove2Me worksResearch paper
SKILL.mdTourFAQContactTerms
© 2026 Prove2Me